ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

User Manual
Original Instructions
ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

Catalog Numbers 1756-IA8D, 1756-IA16, 1756-IA16I, 1756-IA32, 1756-IB16, 1756-IB16D, 1756-IB16I, 1756-IB16IF,
1756-IB32, 1756-IC16, 1756-IG16, 1756-IH16I, 1756-IM16I, 1756-IN16, 1756-IV16, 1756-IV32, 1756-OA8, 1756-OA8D,
1756-OA8E, 1756-OA16, 1756-OA16I, 1756-OB8, 1756-OB8EI, 1756-OB8I, 1756-OB16D, 1756-OB16E, 1756-OB16I,
1756-OB16IEF, 1756-OB16IEFS, 1756-OB16IS, 1756-OB32, 1756-OC8, 1756-OG16, 1756-OH8I, 1756-ON8, 1756-OV16E,
1756-OV32E, 1756-OW16I, 1756-OX8I
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are
required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may
be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Product Compatibility and Download Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Chapter 1
What Are ControlLogix Available Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Digital I/O Modules? I/O Modules in the ControlLogix System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Module Identification and Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 2
Digital I/O Operation in the Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ControlLogix System 1756-OB16IEF Redundant Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Internal Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Direct Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rack-optimized Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Suggestions for Rack-optimized Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input Modules in a Local Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
RPI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Trigger Event Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Input Modules in a Remote Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote Input Modules Connected
via the ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Input Modules Connected
via the EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Output Module Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Output Modules in a Local Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Output Modules in a Remote Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Remote Output Modules Connected
via the ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Remote Output Modules Connected
via the EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Listen-only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Multiple Owner-Controllers of Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Configuration Changes in an Input Module
with Multiple Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 3

Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Common Module Features Input Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Output Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removal and Insertion Under Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Module Fault Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Software Configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Electronic Keying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Module Inhibiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs
and Schedule Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Producer/Consumer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Status Indicator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Common Features Specific to Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State. . . . . . 45
Set RPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Enable Change of State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Software Configurable Filter Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules . . . . . . . . . 47
Multiple Input Point Densities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Common Features Specific to Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Configurable Point-level Output States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Output Data Echo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules . . . . . . . 50
Multiple Output Point Densities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Electronic Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Field Power Loss Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Diagnostic Latch of Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Time-scheduled Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules
and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules
and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fuse Blown Bit per Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Table of Contents
Chapter 4
Diagnostic Module Features Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Diagnostic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Diagnostic Latch of Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Diagnostic Timestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8-Point AC/16-Point DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Point-level Fault Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Open Wire Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Field Power Loss Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field Wiring Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
No Load Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Field-side Output Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Pulse Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 5
Fast Module Features Fast Input Module Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fast Output Module Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fast Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Features Specific to Fast Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pulse Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Per Point Timestamping and Change of State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Software Configurable Filter Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Features Specific to Fast Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Programmable Fault State Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pulse Width Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Redundant Owners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Configure Redundant Owners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
About Redundant Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Configure the Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Response Times for Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Table of Contents
Chapter 6
Install ControlLogix I/O Modules Install the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Key the Removable Terminal Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Connect the Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
RTB Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
RTB Wiring Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing . . . . . . . . . . 122
Choose Extended-depth Housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended-depth Housing . 124
Install the Removable Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Remove the Removable Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Remove the Module from the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Chapter 7
Configure ControlLogix Configuration Process Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Digital I/O Modules Create a New Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Module Definitions, Communication
or Connection Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Edit the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Connection Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
View and Change Module Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 8
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
1756-IA8D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1756-IA16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1756-IA16I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
1756-IA32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
1756-IB16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
1756-IB16D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
1756-IB16I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
1756-IB16IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1756-IB32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
1756-IC16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1756-IG16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
1756-IH16I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
1756-IM16I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
1756-IN16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
1756-IV16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
1756-IV32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
1756-OA8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1756-OA8D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
1756-OA8E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
1756-OA16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
1756-OA16I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
1756-OB8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Table of Contents
1756-OB8EI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1756-OB8I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
1756-OB16D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
1756-OB16E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1756-OB16I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
1756-OB16IEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1756-OB16IEFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1756-OB16IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
1756-OB32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1756-OC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1756-OG16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1756-OH8I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
1756-ON8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
1756-OV16E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1756-OV32E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
1756-OW16I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
1756-OX8I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Appendix A
Troubleshoot Your Module Status Indicators for Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Status Indicators for Output Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Use the Logix Designer Application for Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . 182
Fault Type Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Appendix B
Tag Definitions Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fast Input Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fast Output Module Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1756-OB16IEF Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1756-OB16IEFS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Redundant Owner Configuration Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Redundant Owner Input Tag Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Redundant Owner Output Tag Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Array Data Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Table of Contents
Appendix C
Use Ladder Logic To Perform Using Message Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Run Time Services and Processing Real-time Control and Module Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
One Service Performed Per Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Reconfiguration
Create a New Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Enter Message Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Communication Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs
for Standard and Diagnostic I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
for Fast I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Reset a Fuse, Perform Pulse Test,
and Reset Latched Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification
and Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Review of Tags in Ladder Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Appendix D
Choose a Correct Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Appendix E
Motor Starters for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Digital I/O Modules Determine the Maximum Number of Motor Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Appendix F
Major Revision Upgrades If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying I/O Configuration . . . 240
If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Appendix G
1492 IFMs for Digital I/O Modules Cable Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Preface
This manual describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot your
ControlLogix® digital I/O modules. There is also a complete listing of digital
input and output modules, including specifications and wiring diagrams. You
must be able to program and operate a ControlLogix controller to use your
digital I/O module efficiently.
Summary of Changes We added information about how to configure the 1756-OB16IEF

Redundant Owner. See page 102.
Product Compatibility and Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, DTM, and EDS), and
access product release notes from the Product Compatibility and Download
Download Center Center at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/
support/pcdc.page.

Preface
Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
1756 ControlLogix I/O Modules Specifications Provides specifications for ControlLogix I/O modules.
Technical Data, publication 1756-TD002
1756 ControlLogix Power Supplies Specifications Provides specifications for ControlLogix power
Technical Data, publication 1756-TD005 supplies.
ControlLogix High-speed Counter Module User Manual, Describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot
publication 1756-UM007 the 1756-HSC counter module.
ControlLogix Low-speed Counter Module User Manual, Describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot
publication 1756-UM536 the 1756-LSC8XIB8I counter module.
ControlLogix Peer I/O Control Application Technique, Describes typical peer control applications and
publication 1756-AT016 provides details about how to configure I/O modules
for peer control operation.
Position-based Output Control with the MAOC Instruction, Describes typical applications for using scheduled
publication 1756-AT017 output modules with the Motion Axis Output Cam
(MAOC) instruction.
Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Describes how to configure CIP Sync with Integrated
Application Technique, publication IA-AT003 Architecture® products and applications.
ControlLogix DC Digital I/O Modules Installation Describes how to install and wire the ControlLogix DC
Instructions, publication 1756-IN062 digital I/O modules.
ControlLogix AC Digital I/O Modules Installation Describes how to install and wire the ControlLogix AC
Instructions, publication 1756-IN064 digital I/O modules.
ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions, Describes how to install ControlLogix power supplies.
publication 1756-IN619
ControlLogix Redundant Power Supply Installation Describes how to install ControlLogix redundant power
Instructions, publication 1756-IN620 supplies.
ControlLogix Analog I/O Modules User Manual, Describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot
publication 1756-UM009 ControlLogix analog I/O modules.
ControlLogix Data Highway Plus-Remote I/O Describes how to configure and operate the
Communication Interface Module User Manual, ControlLogix Data Highway Plus™ / Remote I/O
publication 1756-UM514 module.
ControlLogix-XT Data Highway Plus-Remote I/O Describes how to install, configure, and troubleshoot
Communication Interface Module Installation the ControlLogix-XT Data Highway Plus-Remote I/O
Instructions, publication 1756-IN638 Communication Interface module.
ControlLogix System User Manual, Describes how to install, configure, program, and
publication 1756-UM001 operate a ControlLogix system.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell
publication 1770-4.1 Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http:// Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and
www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/ other certification details.
overview.page
You can view or download publications at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page.
To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Chapter 1
What Are ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules?
Topic Page
Available Features 11
I/O Modules in the ControlLogix System 12
Module Identification and Status Information 15
ControlLogix® digital I/O modules are input and output modules that provide
On/Off detection and actuation. By using the producer/consumer network
model, digital I/O modules can produce information when needed while
providing additional system functions.
Available Features This table lists several features available on ControlLogix digital I/O modules.
Feature Description
Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) You can remove and insert modules and removable terminal blocks
(RTB) while power is applied.
Producer/consumer communication This communication method is an intelligent data exchange between
modules and other system devices in which each module produces
data without first being polled.
System time stamp of data A 64-bit system clock places a time stamp on the transfer of data
between the module and its owner-controller.
Module-level fault reporting and field-side Fault and diagnostic detection capabilities to help you effectively and
diagnostic detection efficiently use your module and troubleshoot your application.
Agency Certification Class 1, Division 2 agency certification for any application that
requires approval.

Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules?
I/O Modules in the ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and require either a
removable terminal block (RTB) or a Bulletin 1492 wiring interface module
ControlLogix System
(IFM)(1) to connect all field-side wiring.
Before you install and use your module, you must do the following:
• Install and ground a 1756 chassis and power supply. To install these
products, refer to the publications listed in Additional Resources on
page 10.
• Order and receive an RTB or IFM and its components for your
application.
IMPORTANT RTBs and IFMs are not included with your module purchase. See page 112
for RTBs and page 237 for IFMs.
Table 1 - ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

Cat. No. Description Page
1756-IA8D 79…132V AC 8-point diagnostic input module 135
1756-IA16 74…132V AC 16-point input module 135
1756-IA16I 79…132V AC 16-point isolated input module 136
1756-IA32 74…132V AC 32-point input module 137
1756-IB16 10…31.2V DC 16-point input module 138
1756-IB16D 10…30V DC diagnostic input module 139
1756-IB16I 10…30V DC 16-point, isolated input module 140
1756-IB16IF 10…30V DC,16-point, isolated, fast peer control input module 141
1756-IB32 10…31.2V DC 32-point input module 142
1756-IC16 30…60V DC 16-point input module 143
1756-IG16 Transitor-transitor logic (TTL) input module 144
1756-IH16I 90…146V DC 16-point isolated input module 145
1756-IM16I 159…265V AC 16-point isolated input module 146
1756-IN16 10…30V AC 16-point input module 146
1756-IV16 10…30V DC 16-point sourcing current input module 147
1756-IV32 10…30V DC 32-point sourcing current input module 148
1756-OA8 74…265V AC 8-point output module 149
1756-OA8D 74…132V AC 8-point diagnostic output module 150
1756-OA8E 74…132V AC 8-point electronically-fused output module 151
1756-OA16 74... 265V AC 16-point output module 152
1756-OA16I 74…265V AC 16-point isolated output module 153
1756-OB8 10…30V DC 8-point output module 154
1756-OB8EI 10…30V DC 8-point electronically-fused, isolated output module 155
1756-OB8I 10…30V DC 8-point isolated output module 156
1756-OB16D 19.2…30V DC 16-point diagnostic output module 157
(1) The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTB catalog numbers 1756-TBCH, 1756-TBNH,
1756-TBSH, and 1756-TBS6H. Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring
termination methods may require application-specific approval by the certifying agency.

What Are ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules? Chapter 1
Table 1 - ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules (continued)

Cat. No. Description Page
1756-OB16E 10…31.2V DC 16-point electronically-fused output module 158
1756-OB16I 10…30V DC 16-point isolated output module 161
1756-OB16IEF 10…30V DC,16-point, isolated, fast peer control output module 162
1756-OB16IEFS 10…30V DC, 16-point, isolated, fast, scheduled per point output module 163
1756-OB16IS 10…30V DC scheduled, isolated output module 164
1756-OB32 10…31.2V DC 32-point output module 165
1756-OC8 30…60V DC 8-point output module 166
1756-OG16 Transitor-transitor logic (TTL) output module 167
1756-OH81 90…146V DC 8-point isolated output module 168
1756-ON8 10…30V AC 8-point output module 169
1756-OV16E 10…30V DC 16-point electronically-fused, sinking current output module 170
1756-OV32E 10…30V DC 32-point electronically-fused, sinking current output module 171
1756-OW16I 10…265V, 5-150V DC 16-point isolated contact module 172
1756-OX8I 10…265V, 5-150V DC 8-point isolated contact module 173

Figure 1 - Parts Illustration
DC OUTPUT
3 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O
5
K
Removable Terminal Block
4
2
1
6
40200-M
Item Description
1 Backplane Connector—Interface for the ControlLogix system that connects the module to the
backplane.
2 Top and bottom guides—Guides provide assistance in seating the RTB or IFM onto the module.
3 Status indicators—Indicators display the status of communication, module health, and input/
output devices. Indicators help in troubleshooting anomalies.
4 Connector pins—Input/output, power, and grounding connections are made to the module through
these pins with the use of an RTB or IFM.
5 Locking tab—The locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM on the module, maintaining wiring
connections.
6 Slots for keying—Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent making the wrong wire connections to your
module.

What Are ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules? Chapter 1
Module Identification and Each ControlLogix I/O module maintains specific identification information
that separates it from all other modules. This information assists you in
Status Information tracking all the components of your system.
For example, you can track module identification information to know which
modules are in any ControlLogix chassis at any time. While retrieving module
identity, you can also retrieve module status.
Item Description
Product type Module product type, such as digital I/O or analog I/O
Product code Module catalog number
Major revision Module major revision number
Minor revision Module minor revision number
Status Module status, including these items:
• Controller ownership
• Whether the module has been configured
• Device-specific status, such as the following:
– Self-test
– Update in progress
– Communications fault
– Not owned (outputs in Program mode)
– Internal fault (needs update)
– Run mode
– Program mode (outputs only)
• Minor recoverable fault
• Minor unrecoverable fault
• Major recoverable fault
• Major unrecoverable fault
Vendor Module manufacturer vendor, such as Allen-Bradley
Serial number Module serial number
Length of ASCII text string Number of characters in module text string
ASCII text string Module ASCII text string description
IMPORTANT You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this information. For more
information, refer to page 226.

Notes:

Chapter 2
Digital I/O Operation in the

ControlLogix System
Topic Page
Ownership 18
1756-OB16IEF Redundant Owner 18
Internal Module Operation 18
Connections 21
Input Module Operation 23
Input Modules in a Local Chassis 24
Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 25
Output Module Operation 28
Output Modules in a Local Chassis 28
Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 29
Listen-only Mode 31
Multiple Owner-Controllers of Input Modules 31
Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners 32
I/O modules are the interface between controllers and field devices in a
ControlLogix® system. Digital I/O modules transfer data to devices that
require just one bit to be represented (0 or 1). For example, a switch is open or
closed, or a light is on or off.

Chapter 2 Digital I/O Operation in the ControlLogix System
Ownership I/O modules in a ControlLogix system can be owned by a Logix5000™

controller. An owner-controller fulfills these functions:
• Stores configuration data for every module that it owns
• Sends I/O modules configuration data to define module behavior and
begin module operation with the control system
• Resides in a local or remote chassis in regard to the I/O module position
Each ControlLogix I/O module must continuously maintain communication

with its owner-controller to operate normally.
Typically, each module in the system has only one owner-controller. Input
modules can have more than one owner-controller. Output modules, however,
are limited to a single owner-controller.
For more information about using multiple owner-controllers, see

Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners on page 32.
1756-OB16IEF Redundant Owner
Redundant ownership lets a single controller use redundant adapters to

communicate with a single output or lets two separate controllers coordinate to
control the output.
See Redundant Owners on page 102.
Internal Module Operation ControlLogix I/O modules experience signal propagation delays that must be
accounted for during operation. Some of these delays are user-configurable,
and some are inherent to the module hardware.
For example, there is a small delay, typically less than 1 ms, between when a
signal is applied at the RTB of a ControlLogix input module and when a signal
is sent to the system over the backplane. This time reflects a filter time of 0 ms
for a DC input.
This section offers an explanation of the time limitations with ControlLogix

I/O modules.

Digital I/O Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2
Input Modules
As shown in the illustration, ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at

the RTB and process it internally through hardware, filters, and an ASIC scan
before sending a signal to the backplane via the requested packet interval (RPI)
or at a Change of State (COS) occurrence. The RPI is a configured interval of
time that determines when module data is sent to the controller.
Hardware Delay Filter Delay ASIC Delay
Signal Applied Signal Sent to

42701 at the RTB the Backplane
The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal propagation on
an I/O module.
Delay Description
Hardware How the module is configured and the variance between the type of modules affects
how the signal is processed.
Filter User configuration varies between modules, thus affecting the signal propagation.
ASIC ASIC scan = 200 μs.
EXAMPLE A typical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors that can
contribute. For example, if you are turning on a 1756-IB16 module at 24V DC
in 25 °C (77 °F) conditions, the signal propagation delay is affected by these
factors:
• Hardware delay to energize the input (typically 290 μs on the
1756-IB16 module)
• User-configurable filter time of 0, 1, or 2 ms
• ASIC scan of 200 μs
In the worst case scenario with a filter time of 0 ms, the 1756-IB16 module
has a 490 μs signal propagation delay.
These times are not guaranteed. For nominal and maximum delay times for
each module, see the 1756 ControlLogix I/O Modules Specifications Technical
Data, publication 1756-TD002.

Output Modules
ControlLogix output modules receive a signal from the controller and process
it internally via hardware and an ASIC scan before sending a signal to the
output device via the RTB.
ASIC Delay Hardware Delay
Signal Received Signal Sent from

from Controller RTB Output Point
42702
The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal propagation on
an I/O module.
Delay Description
Hardware How the module is configured and the variance between the type of modules affects
how the signal is processed.
ASIC ASIC scan = 200 μs.
EXAMPLE A typical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors that can
contribute. For example, if you are turning on a 1756-OB16E module at
24V DC in 25 °C (77 °F) conditions, the signal propagation delay is affected
by these factors:
• Hardware delay to energize the input (typically 70 μs on the
1756-OB16E module)
• ASIC scan of 200 μs
In the worst case scenario with a filter time of 0 ms, the 1756-OB16E module
has a 270 μs signal propagation delay.
These times are not guaranteed. See Chapter 8 for nominal and maximum
delay times for each module.

Connections With ControlLogix I/O modules, a connection is the data transfer link
between a controller and an I/O module. A connection can be one of these
types:
• Direct
• Rack-optimized
This table lists the advantages and disadvantages of each connection type.
Connection Type Advantages Disadvantages
Direct All input and data echo information is With more data transferring over the
transferred, including diagnostic network, your system does not operate as
information and fusing data. efficiently as with rack connections.
Rack-optimized Connection usage is economized. The Input and data echo information is limited
owner-controller has a single RPI value to general faults and data.
for each connection.
Direct Connections
A direct connection is a real-time data transfer link between the controller and
the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references. When
module configuration data is downloaded to an owner-controller, the
controller attempts to establish a direct connection to each of the modules that
is referenced by the data.
If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control system,

the controller periodically checks for the presence of a device there. When the
presence of a device is detected there, the controller automatically sends the
configuration data.
If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot, a connection is made
and operation begins. If the configuration data is not appropriate, the data is
rejected and an error message appears in the software. In this case, the
configuration data can be inappropriate for any of a number of reasons. For
example, module configuration data may be appropriate except for a mismatch
in electronic keying that prevents normal operation.
The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module. Any
break in the connection causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data
area associated with the module. Breaks in the connection can be caused by a
module fault or the removal of the module from the chassis while under power.
Logix Designer monitors fault status bits to annunciate module failures.

Rack-optimized Connections
When a digital I/O module is in a remote chassis with respect to its owner-
controller, you may be able to choose Rack Optimization or Listen-only Rack
Optimization during module configuration. The option you choose depends
on the communication module configuration. If the communication module
uses Listen-only Rack Optimization, then the I/O module must also use
Listen-only Rack Optimization.
A rack-optimized connection economizes bandwidth between owner-

controllers and digital I/O modules in the remote chassis. Rather than having
several direct connections with individual RPI values, an owner-controller has
a single rack connection with a single RPI value. That RPI value
accommodates all digital I/O modules in the remote chassis.
IMPORTANT Because rack-optimized connections are applicable only in applications that
use a remote chassis, you must configure the communication format , as
described in Chapter 7, for both the remote I/O module and the remote
1756-CNB module or EtherNet/IP module.
Make sure you configure both modules for rack optimization. If you choose a
different communication format for each module, the controller makes two
connections to the same chassis (one for each format) and the same data
travels across the ControlNet network.
If you use rack optimization for both modules, you preserve bandwidth and
configure your system to operate more efficiently.
The input, or data echo, information is limited to general faults and data. No
additional status, such as diagnostic information, is available.
IMPORTANT Each controller can establish connections, in any combination of direct or

rack-optimized. In other words, you can use a rack-optimized connection
between an owner-controller and multiple remote I/O modules while
simultaneously using a direct connection between that same controller and
any other I/O modules in the same remote chassis.
Figure 2 shows how a rack-optimized connection eliminates the need for three
separate connections. The owner-controller in the local chassis communicates
with all the I/O modules in the remote chassis but uses only one connection.
The ControlNet communication module sends data from the modules
simultaneously at the RPI.

Figure 2 - Rack-optimized Connection
Local Chassis Remote Chassis
One Connection for

All Remote I/O
ControlNet Network
41021
Suggestions for Rack-optimized Connections

We recommend that you use a rack-optimized connection for these
applications:
• Standard digital I/O modules

• Non-fused digital output modules
• Owner-controllers running low on connections
IMPORTANT Rack-optimized connections are available only to digital I/O modules.

However, do not use a rack-optimized connection for diagnostic I/O modules
or fused output modules. Diagnostic and fused output data is not
transferred over a rack-optimized connection. This defeats the purpose of
using those modules.
Input Module Operation In traditional I/O systems, controllers poll input modules to obtain their input
status. In the ControlLogix system, a controller does not poll digital input
modules. Instead, the modules multicast their data either upon change of state
(COS) or requested packet interval (RPI). The frequency depends on the
options chosen during configuration and whether the input module is local or
remote. This method of communication uses the Producer/Consumer model.
The input module is the producer of input data and the controller is the
consumer of the data.
All ControlLogix inputs are updated asynchronously in relation to the

controller’s task execution. In other words, an input may be updated in the
controller at any time during the controller’s execution of the tasks it is
configured to run. The input device determines when the input is sent based
on its configuration.

The behavior of an input module also varies depending upon whether it

operates in the local chassis or in a remote chassis. The following sections detail
the differences in data transfers between local and remote installations.
Input Modules in a When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner-controller, these two
configuration parameters affect how and when an input module multicasts
Local Chassis data:
• Requested packet interval (RPI)
• Change of state (COS)
RPI
The RPI defines the slowest rate at which a module multicasts its data to the
owner-controller. The time ranges from 200 µs…750 ms and is sent to the
module with all other configuration parameters. When the specified time
frame elapses, the module multicasts data. This is also called a cyclic update.
COS
COS instructs the module to transfer data whenever a specified input point
transitions from On to Off or Off to On. The transition is referred to as a
change of state.
IMPORTANT The module COS feature defaults to Enabled for both On-to-Off and
Off-to-On.
COS configuration occurs on a per-point basis, but all module data is multicast
when any point enabled for COS changes state. COS is more efficient than
RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs.
IMPORTANT You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you enable COS. If a change
does not occur within the RPI timeframe, the module still multicasts data at
the rate specified by the RPI.
For example, if an input is changing state consistently every two seconds and
the RPI is set at 750 ms, the data transfer looks like the illustration.
= COS Multicast
250 500 750 1250 1500 1750 2250 2500 2750 3250
= RPI Multicast 1 Second 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 41381

Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the program scan, it
is possible for an input to change state during program scan execution. The
point must be buffered to prevent this from occurring. To buffer the point, you
can copy the input data from your input tags to another structure and use the
data from there.
TIP To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth, use a larger RPI value if COS is
enabled and the module is in the same chassis as its owner-controller.
Trigger Event Tasks
When configured, ControlLogix digital input modules can trigger an event

task. The event task lets you execute a section of logic immediately when an
event, or receipt of new data, occurs.
Your ControlLogix digital I/O module can trigger event tasks whenever
module input data changes state. Refer to these considerations when using a
digital input module to trigger an event task:
• Only one input module can trigger a specific event task.
• Input modules trigger the event task based on the module COS
configuration. The COS configuration defines which points prompt the
module to produce data if they turn On or Off. This production of data
triggers the event task.
• Typically, enable COS for only one point on the module. If you enable
COS for multiple points, a task overlap of the event task may occur.
For more information on event tasks, refer to the Logix5000 Controllers Tasks,
Programs, and Routines Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM005.
Input Modules in a If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the
owner-controller resides, the role of the RPI and the module COS behavior
Remote Chassis changes slightly with respect to getting data to the owner.
The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module multicasts data
within its own chassis, as described in the previous section. But, only the value
of the RPI determines when the owner-controller receives it over the network.

Remote Input Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network
When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote chassis

connected by a scheduled ControlNet network, in addition to instructing the
module to multicast data within its own chassis, the RPI also reserves a spot in
the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network.
The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value
of the RPI. But, the control system guarantees that the owner-controller
receives data at least as often as the specified RPI.
As shown in Figure 3, the input data within the remote chassis is multicast at
the configured RPI. The ControlNet communication module sends input data
back to the owner-controller at least as often as the RPI.
Figure 3 - Remote Input Modules on ControlNet Network

Multicast Data
ControlNet Network
40947
The module RPI and reserved spot on the network are asynchronous to each
other. This means there are best and worst case scenarios as to when the
owner-controller receives updated data from the module in a remote chassis.
Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario
In the best case scenario, the module performs an RPI multicast with updated
channel data just before the reserved network spot is made available. In this
case, the remotely-located owner receives the data almost immediately.

Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario
In the worst case scenario, the module performs an RPI multicast just after the
reserved network slot has passed. In this case, the owner-controller does not
receive data until the next available network slot.
IMPORTANT Enabling the COS feature on an input module in a remote chassis lets the
module multicast data at both the RPI rate and when the input changes
state. This helps to reduce the worst case time.
When selecting values for the remote module RPI, system throughput is
optimized when its RPI value is a power of two times the current NUT
running on the ControlNet network.
For example, Table 2 shows recommended RPI values for a system by using a
NUT of 5 ms.
Table 2 - Recommended RPI Values for System by Using NUT of 5 ms

NUT=5 ms x20 x21 x22 x23 x24 x25 x26 x27
Optimal RPI 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms 80 ms 160 ms 320 ms 640 ms
Values (ms)
Remote Input Modules Connected via the EtherNet/IP Network
When remote digital input modules are connected to the owner-controller via
an EtherNet/IP network, data is transferred to the owner-controller at these
times:
• At the RPI, the module produces data within its own chassis.
• At the COS (if enabled), the 1756 EtherNet/IP communication

module in the remote chassis immediately sends the module data over
the network to the owner-controller as long as it has not sent data within
a time frame that is one-quarter the value of the digital input module
RPI. This helps prevent flooding the network with data.
For example, if a digital input module uses an RPI = 100 ms, the
EtherNet/IP module sends module data immediately on receiving it if
another data packet was not sent within the last 25 ms.
For more information about specifying an RPI rate, see the Logix5000
Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual,
publication 1756-RM094.

Output Module Operation An owner-controller sends output data to an output module when either one
of two things occur:
• At the end of every one of its tasks (local chassis only)
• At the rate specified in the module RPI
When an output module resides in a remote chassis with respect to the owner-
controller, the owner-controller sends data to the output module only at the
RPI rate that is specified for the module. Updates are not performed at the end
of the owner-controller’s tasks.
Whenever the module receives data from the controller, it immediately

multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system. The
actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data and multicast
back out onto the network. This is called output data echo.
IMPORTANT In this Producer/Consumer model, the output module is the consumer of the
controller’s output data and the producer of the data echo.
Output Modules in a The owner-controller updates ControlLogix digital output modules in the
local chassis at the end of every task and at the RPI.
Local Chassis
When you specify an RPI value for a digital output module, you instruct the
owner-controller when to broadcast the output data to the module. If the
module resides in the same chassis as the owner-controller, as shown in
Figure 4, the module receives the data almost immediately after the owner-
controller sends it. Backplane transfer times are small.
Figure 4 - Local Output Modules
Data is sent at the end of

every task and at the RPI.
40949
Depending on the value of the RPI with respect to the length of the program
scan, the output module can receive and echo data multiple times during one
program scan.

Output Modules in a If an output module physically resides in a chassis other than that of the
owner-controller, the owner-controller normally sends data to the output
Remote Chassis module at the RPI rate specified. Updates are not performed at the end of the
controller’s tasks.
In addition, the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes slightly
with respect to getting data from the owner-controller.
Remote Output Modules Connected via the ControlNet Network

When an RPI value is specified for an output module in a remote chassis
connected to the owner-controller by a scheduled ControlNet network, in
addition to instructing the owner-controller to multicast the output data
within its own chassis, the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing
across the ControlNet network.
The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value
of the RPI. But, the control system guarantees that the output module receives
data at least as often as the specified RPI, as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5 - Remote Output Modules on ControlNet Network
Data is sent from the Output data is sent at

owner-controller. least as often as RPI.
ControlNet Network
42675
The reserved spot on the network and the output data sent by the controller
are asynchronous to each other. This means there are best and worst case
scenarios as to when the owner-controller receives updated data from the
module in a remote chassis.
Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario
In the best case scenario, the owner-controller sends the output data just before
the reserved network slot is made available. In this case, the remote output
module receives the data almost immediately.

Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario
In the worst case scenario, the owner-controller sends the output data just after
the reserved network slot has passed. In this case, the output module does not
receive data until the next available network slot.
IMPORTANT These best and worst case scenarios indicate the time that is required for
output data to transfer from the owner-controller to the module once the
owner-controller has produced it. They do not take into account the user
program time in the owner-controller.
The receipt of new data is a function of the length of the user program and
its asynchronous relationship with the RPI.
The owner-controller updates remote output modules at the end of each
task and at the RPI, as described earlier in this section, if your application
uses these components:
• 1756-CNB/D or 1756-CNBR/D modules
• Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application
Remote Output Modules Connected via the EtherNet/IP Network
When remote digital output modules are connected to the owner-controller

via an EtherNet/IP network, the controller sends output data at these times:
• When the RPI timer expires
• When an Immediate Output (IOT) instruction, if programmed, is

executed
An IOT sends data immediately and resets the RPI timer.
• When a new schedule is created for a 1756-OB16IEFS module from the

motion planner for a cam that has been armed by an MAOC instruction
Because the 1756-OB16IEFS module is the only 1756 module that can
be used in a remote chassis with the MAOC instruction, it is the only
module that receives output data in this scenario.

Listen-only Mode Any controller in the system can listen to the data from any I/O module, such
as input data, echoed output data, or echoed diagnostic information. Even if a
controller does not own a module, or hold the module configuration data, the
controller can still listen to the module.
During the module configuration process, you can specify one of several Listen
modes. For more information, see Communication or Connection Formats on
page 127.
Choosing a Listen mode lets the controller and module establish

communication without the controller sending any configuration data. In this
instance, another controller owns the module being listened to.
IMPORTANT In Listen-only mode, controllers continue to receive data multicast from the
I/O module as long as the connection between the owner-controller and I/O
module is maintained.
If the connection between the owner-controller and module is broken, the
module stops multicasting data and connections to all listening controllers
are also broken.
Multiple Owner-Controllers If a connection is lost between an owner-controller and a module, the

connection is also lost between any controllers listening to that module. As a
of Input Modules result, the ControlLogix system lets you define more than one owner-
controller for most input modules. Input modules that have Output tags do
not allow more than one owner-controller.
IMPORTANT Only input modules can have multiple owner-controllers. If multiple owner-
controllers are connected to the same input module, they must maintain
identical configurations for that module.
In Figure 6, controller A and controller B both have been configured to be

owner-controllers of the same input module.
Figure 6 - Identical Owner-Controller Configurations for Input Module
Initial Configuration A Input B Initial Configuration
Input Module Input Module

Configuration Configuration
Data Data
Xxxxx A B Xxxxx
Xxxxx Xxxxx
Xxxxx Xxxxx
41056

As soon as a controller receives its user program, it tries to establish a

connection with the input module. A connection is established with the
controller whose configuration data arrives first. When the second controller’s
configuration data arrives, the module compares it to its current configuration
data, which was received and accepted from the first controller.
If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the data sent by
the first controller, that connection is also accepted. If any parameter of the
second configuration data is different from the first, the module rejects the
connection and the user is informed by an error in the software or via program
logic.
The advantage of multiple owners over a Listen-only connection is that either

of the controllers can break the connection to the module, and the module
continues to operate and multicast data to the system through the connection
maintained by the other controller.
Configuration Changes in an You must be careful when changing the configuration data of an input module
in a multiple owner scenario. If the configuration data is changed in owner A
Input Module with Multiple and sent to the module, that configuration data is accepted as the new
Owners configuration for the module. Owner B continues to listen unaware that any
changes have been made in the behavior of the input module, as illustrated.
Figure 7 - Module Configuration Changes with Multiple Owners

Initial Configuration A Input B Initial Configuration
Input Module Input Module

Configuration Configuration
Data Data
Xxxxx A B Xxxxx
Zzzzz Xxxxx
Xxxxx Xxxxx
41057
IMPORTANT A message in Logix Designer alerts you to the possibility of a multiple

owner-controller situation and lets you inhibit the connection before
changing the module configuration. When changing the configuration for a
module with multiple owners, we recommend that you inhibit the
connection.

To prevent other owner-controllers from receiving potentially erroneous data,

use these steps when changing the configuration of a module in a multiple
owner scenario while online.
1. For each owner-controller, inhibit the connection to the module either

in the software on the Connection tab or the message dialog box
warning you of the multiple owner condition.
2. Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software. For
more information about using Logix Designer to change the
configuration, see Chapter 7.
3. Repeat step 1 and step 2 for all owner-controllers, making the exact
same changes in each.
4. Clear the Inhibit checkbox in each owner-controller configuration.

Notes:

Chapter 3
Common Module Features
Topic Page
Input Module Compatibility 35
Output Module Compatibility 36
Common Features 37
Common Features Specific to Input Modules 44
Common Features Specific to Output Modules 48
Fault and Status Reporting between Input Modules and Controllers 58
Fault and Status Reporting between Output Modules and Controllers 59
Input Module Compatibility ControlLogix® digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect
whether they are On or Off.
ControlLogix input modules convert AC or DC On/Off signals from user

devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor. Typical input
devices include the following:
• Proximity switches
• Limit switches
• Selector switches
• Float switches
• Push button switches
When designing systems with ControlLogix input modules, consider these

factors:
• Voltage necessary for your application
• Current leakage
• Whether you need a solid state device
• Whether your application uses sinking or sourcing wiring

Chapter 3 Common Module Features
Output Module Compatibility ControlLogix output modules can be used to drive a variety of output devices.
Typical output devices compatible with ControlLogix outputs include these
items:
• Motor starters
• Solenoids
• Indicators
Follow these guidelines when designing a system:
• Make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge
and continuous current for proper operation.
• Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded.
Damage to the module could result.
When sizing output loads, refer to the documentation supplied with the
output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the
device.
The ControlLogix standard digital outputs are capable of directly driving the
ControlLogix standard digital inputs. The exceptions are the AC and DC
diagnostic input modules. When diagnostics are used, a shunt resistor is
required for leakage current.
For information on the compatibility of motor starters with ControlLogix

output modules, see Appendix E.

Common Module Features Chapter 3
Common Features This table lists features common to all ControlLogix digital I/O modules.
Topic Page
Removal and Insertion Under Power 37
Module Fault Reporting 37
Software Configurable 38
Electronic Keying 38
Module Inhibiting 39
Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs 40
Producer/Consumer Communication 44
Status Indicator Information 44
Removal and Insertion Under Power

All ControlLogix I/O modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis
while power is applied. This feature enables greater availability of the overall
control system. While the module is being removed or inserted, there is no
additional disruption to the rest of the control process. This helps prevent an
entire production line from having to be shut down.
Module Fault Reporting
ControlLogix digital I/O modules provide both hardware and software

indication when a module fault has occurred. Each fault status indicator and
Logix Designer graphically display this fault and include a fault message
describing the nature of the fault.
This feature lets you determine how your module has been affected and what
action to take to resume normal operation.
The 1756-OB16IEF module extends this feature by enabling you to define the
duration of time before the module transitions to On or Off after a fault
occurs. For more information, see Programmable Fault State Delays on
page 91.

Software Configurable
Logix Designer provides an interface to configure each module. All module

features are enabled or disabled through the I/O configuration within the
software.
You can also use the software to retrieve this information from any module in
the system:
• Serial number
• Firmware revision information
• Product code
• Vendor
• Error and fault information
• Diagnostic counters
By eliminating tasks, such as setting hardware switches and jumpers, the

software makes module configuration easier and more reliable.
Electronic Keying
Electronic Keying reduces the possibility that you use the wrong device in a
control system. It compares the device that is defined in your project to the
installed device. If keying fails, a fault occurs. These attributes are compared.
Attribute Description
Vendor The device manufacturer.
Device Type The general type of the product, for example, digital I/O module.
Product Code The specific type of the product. The Product Code maps to a catalog number.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities of a device.
Minor Revision A number that represents behavior changes in the device.

These Electronic Keying options are available.
Keying Option Description

Compatible Lets the installed device accept the key of the device that is defined in the project when the
Module installed device can emulate the defined device. With Compatible Module, you can typically
replace a device with another device that has these characteristics:
• Same catalog number
• Same or higher Major Revision
• Minor Revision as follows:
– If the Major Revision is the same, the Minor Revision must be the same or higher.
– If the Major Revision is higher, the Minor Revision can be any number.
Disable Keying Indicates that the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with
a device. With Disable Keying, communication can occur with a device other than the type
specified in the project.
ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disable Keying; if used incorrectly, this option
can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
We strongly recommend that you do not use Disable Keying.
If you use Disable Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the
device being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application.
Exact Match Indicates that all keying attributes must match to establish communication. If any attribute
does not match precisely, communication with the device does not occur.
Carefully consider the implications of each keying option when selecting one.
IMPORTANT Changing Electronic Keying parameters online interrupts connections to the device
and any devices that are connected through the device. Connections from other
controllers can also be broken.
If an I/O connection to a device is interrupted, the result can be a loss of data.
More Information
For more detailed information about Electronic Keying, see Electronic Keying
in Logix5000™ Control Systems Application Technique, publication LOGIX-
AT001.
Module Inhibiting
Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an
owner-controller and a digital I/O module without having to remove the
module from the configuration. This process lets you temporarily disable
communication to a module, such as to perform maintenance. You can use
module inhibiting in these ways:
• You write a configuration for an I/O module but inhibit the module to
prevent it from communicating with the owner-controller. In this case,
the owner does not establish a connection and the configuration is not
sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited.

• In your application, a controller already owns a module, has downloaded

the configuration to the module, and is exchanging data over the
connection between the devices. In this case, you can inhibit the module
and the owner-controller behaves as if the connection to the module
does not exist.
IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module, it enters Program mode, and all
outputs change to the state configured for Program mode. For example, if
an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs transition to
zero during Program mode, whenever that module is inhibited, outputs
transition to zero.
You may need to use module inhibiting in these instances:
• Multiple controllers own the same digital input module. A change is

required in the module configuration. However, the change must be
made to the program in all controllers. In this case, you follow these
steps.
a. Inhibit the module.
b. Change configuration in all controllers.
c. Uninhibit the module.
• You want to upgrade a digital I/O module. We recommend you use this
procedure.
a. Inhibit the module.
b. Perform the upgrade.
c. Uninhibit the module.
• You are using a program that includes a module that you do not
physically possess yet, and you do not want the controller to continually
look for a module that does not yet exist. In this case, you can inhibit the
module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot.
Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs
This section describes how to use CST timestamps in standard and diagnostic
I/O modules and the CIP Sync timestamps in fast I/O modules.
Use Coordinated System Time with Standard and Diagnostic I/O Modules
Time masters generate a 64-bit coordinated system time (CST) for their
respective chassis. The CST is a chassis-specific time that is not synchronized
with, or in any way connected to, the time generated over the ControlNet
network to establish a network update time (NUT).

You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and timestamp
input data with a relative time reference of when that input data changes state.
IMPORTANT Because only one CST value is returned to the controller when any input
point changes state, we recommend that you use timestamping on only one
input point per module.
Table 3 - How to use CST timestamps

Topic Description
Timestamping for a The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input module
sequence of events point by timestamping the input data. To determine a sequence of events, you must do the
following:
• Set the communication format of the input module to CST Timestamped Input Data.
• Enable COS for the input point where a sequence occurs, and disable COS for all other
points on the module.
TIP If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS, your
module generates a unique CST each time any of those input
points change state, as long as the changes do not occur within
500 μs of each other.
If multiple input points configured for COS change state within
500 μs of each other, a single CST value is generated for all
making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time.
Timestamping in Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs feature, so that after
conjunction with input data changes state and a timestamp occurs, an output point actuates at some
scheduled outputs configured time in the future.
You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future. When you use timestamping of
inputs and scheduled outputs, you must do the following:
• Choose a communication or connection format for each input and output module that
enables timestamping. For more information, refer to Communication or Connection
Formats on page 127.
• Have a time master in the same chassis as both I/O modules.
• Disable COS for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped.
TIP For scheduled outputs to work most effectively, remember
these items:
• The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must
account for any controller, backplane, and network delays.
• The I/O modules must reside in the same rack as the time
master.

Use CIP Sync Time with Fast I/O Modules
The 1756-IB16IF, 1756-OB16IEF, and 1756-OB16IEFS modules use CIP

Sync for both timestamps and scheduling.
CIP Sync is a CIP implementation of the IEEE 1588 PTP (Precision Time
Protocol). CIP Sync provides accurate real-time (Real-World Time) or
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) synchronization of controllers and
devices that are connected over CIP networks. This technology supports
highly distributed applications that require timestamping, sequence of events
recording, distributed motion control, and increased control coordination.
The 1756-IB16IF, 1756-OB16IEF, and 1756-OB16IEFS modules are CIP

Sync slave-only devices. There must be another module on the network that
functions as a master clock. For more information on how to use CIP Sync
technology, see the Integrated Architecture® and CIP Sync Configuration
Application Technique, publication IA-AT003.
Fast I/O modules can be used to capture timestamps and schedule outputs like
CST-based modules while providing these advantages:
• Fast I/O modules have much higher precision than CST-based

modules.
• Inputs are timestamped by point, so multiple inputs can be configured

for COS without losing timestamp data.
• CIP Sync is system-wide, so timestamp and schedule values are

consistent across all modules in the system. For instance, using 1756-
IB16IF input timestamps to schedule outputs on a 1756-OB16IEF
module means that the controller, input module, and output module are
not restricted to the same chassis as is the case with CST-based I/O.
• Output modules use all 64 bits of the timestamp to schedule, so there are
no limits on schedule ranges.

Mixing CST and CIP Sync Modules in a ControlLogix System
CST is automatically enabled for each chassis that has been configured to use
CIP Sync. Therefore, it is possible to include modules that use CST for their
time base into systems that have been configured to use CIP Sync. Also, there is
a direct correlation between CIP Sync system time and the local chassis CST
time.
The CIP Sync system time and local chassis CST time are related by this
equation:
CIP Sync system time = CST time + offset
The offset in the equation is a value unique to each chassis and can be obtained
by using one of these methods:
• CSTOffset from the Wall Clock Time (WCT) object of a controller in

the chassis
• SystemOffset from the Time Synchronize object of a controller in the

chassis
• LocalClockOffset returned in an I/O connection from a CIP Sync

capable module in the chassis
This relationship enables CST and CIP Sync-based I/O to interoperate as long
as the offset in the chassis containing the CST-based module is accessible.

Producer/Consumer Communication
By using Producer/Consumer communication, ControlLogix I/O modules

can produce data without first being polled by a controller. The modules
produce the data and any other owner-controller device can decide to consume
it.
For example, an input module produces data and any number of processors can
consume the data at the same time. This eliminates the need for one processor
to send the data to another processor. For more information about this process,
see Input Module Operation on page 26.
Status Indicator Information
Each ControlLogix digital I/O module has a status indicator on the front of
the module that lets you check the health and operational status of a module.
The status indicator displays vary for each module.
Status Description
I/O status This yellow display indicates the On/Off state of the field device.
ST IMPORTANT: For the 1756-OA8D and 1756-OA8E modules, the I/O status indicator does
not illuminate without field power applied.
Module status This green display indicates the module communication status.
OK
Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the presence or absence of
FLT various faults.
Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and indicates the state of the
Fuse module fuse.
See Appendix A for examples of status indicators on ControlLogix digital I/O

modules.
Common Features This table lists features specific to ControlLogix digital input modules.
Specific to Input Modules Topic Page
Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State 45
Set RPI 45
Enable Change of State 46
Software Configurable Filter Times 47
Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules 47
Multiple Input Point Densities 48

Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State
Digital input modules always send data at the RPI, but they send data at a
change of state only if the COS feature is enabled. COS is more efficient than
RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs.
The table describes the two ways a module sends data to the owner-controller.
Method Description
RPI A user-defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner-controller.
This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer.
COS Configurable feature that, when enabled, instructs the module to update its owner-controller
with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On. The
data is sent at the RPI rate when there is no change of state. By default, this setting is always
enabled for input modules.
Set RPI
The Connection tab on the Module Properties dialog box lets you enter an
RPI. The RPI guarantees the slowest rate at which data is multicast.
The actual data transfer rate of the module can be faster than the RPI setting.
But, the RPI provides a defined, maximum period of time when data is
transferred to the owner-controller.
Follow these steps to set an RPI value.
1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Connection tab.

2. In the Requested Packet Interval (RPI) field, enter an RPI value.
3. Click OK.

Enable Change of State
The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you set whether
a COS occurs when a field device transitions from Off to On or On to Off.
Follow these steps to enable or disable COS.
1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Configuration tab.
2. Do one of the following in the Enable Change of State columns:

• To enable COS for a point, check the corresponding Off to On or
On to Off checkbox.
• To disable COS for a point, clear the corresponding Off to On or On
to Off checkbox.
3. Click OK.

Software Configurable Filter Times
On-to-Off and Off-to-On filter times can be adjusted through Logix Designer
for all ControlLogix input modules. These filters improve noise immunity
within a signal. A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals
from these modules.
IMPORTANT Input filters on the 1756-IB16IF module function differently than other
digital I/O modules. For information about input filters on the 1756-IB16IF
module, see page 86.
Follow these steps to configure the input filter time.
1. On the right side of the Configuration tab, choose the input filter times
from the Off → On and On → Off pull-down menus.
2. Click OK.
Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Input Modules

ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options.
Some applications require power for the I/O circuits to originate on separate,
isolated power sources. Because these conditions require separate commons for
each channel, some input modules use individual isolation, or point-to-point
isolation so if one point faults, the others continue to operate.
Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are

channel-to-channel isolation and no isolation. Your application determines
what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use.

Multiple Input Point Densities
ControlLogix input modules use either 8-, 16-, or 32-point densities for greater
flexibility in your application. A point is the termination where a wire attaches
to the input module from a field device. The module receives information from
the device to this designated point, thus signaling when activity occurs.
Common Features This table lists features specific to ControlLogix digital output modules.
Specific to Output Modules
IMPORTANT Some features are not available on all output modules. The table indicates
which modules support each feature.
Topic Page Available Modules

Configurable Point-level Output States 49 All modules
Output Data Echo 50 All modules
Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules 50 All modules
Multiple Output Point Densities 51 All modules
Electronic Fusing 51 1756-OA8D
1756-OA8E
1756-OB16D
1756-OB16E
1756-OB8EI
1756-OB16IEF
1756-OB16IEFS
1756-OV16E
1756-OV32E
Field Power Loss Detection 54 1756-OA8E
Diagnostic Latch of Information 55 1756-OA8E
1756-OB16IEF
1756-OB16IEFS
Time-scheduled Output Control 57 1756-OB16IS
1756-OB16IEFS

Configurable Point-level Output States

Individual outputs can be configured to unique output states if the module
goes into Program mode or Fault mode.
IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module, it enters Program mode, and all
outputs change to the state configured for Program mode. For example, if an
output module is configured so that the state of outputs turn Off during
Program mode, whenever that module is inhibited, outputs turn Off.
Follow these steps to configure an output state.
2. From the Program Mode pull-down menu, choose whether the output
state of the module is On or Off during Program mode:
• On
• Off
• Hold (Retain current output state)
3. From the Fault Mode pull-down menu, choose the output state of the
module during Fault mode:
• On
• Off
• Hold (Retain current output state)
4. Click OK.

Output Data Echo
During normal operation, when a controller sends out an output command to

the ControlLogix system, the output module that is targeted for that command
returns the commanded state of the output to the system. This process verifies
that the module has received the command and tried to execute it.
Other devices can use this broadcast signal through a Listen-only connection
to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the
owner-controller.
Monitor Fault Bits
The output data echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the
module is operating under normal conditions. If there is an anomaly with the
module, the commanded state and the output data echo may not match.
You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions. If a
fault occurs, the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition. In
this case, the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the
outputs.
If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the
output data echo, check your output module for these conditions:
• Communication fault.
• Connection is inhibited.
• Blown fuse—The module does not turn on an output if an overload or
short circuit is detected.
• (1756-OA8D and 1756-OA8E only) Loss of field power—The module
does not turn on an output unless AC power is detected.
• Redundant Owner, but this controller is not the Active owner.
Isolated and Nonisolated Varieties of Output Modules
As with input modules, ControlLogix output modules provide isolated or

nonisolated wiring options. I/O modules provide point-to-point, group-to-
group, or channel-to-channel wiring isolation. Your specific application
determines what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use.
IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix I/O modules provide nonisolated, field-side

wiring options, each I/O module maintains internal electrical isolation
between the system side and field side.

Multiple Output Point Densities
ControlLogix output modules use either 8-, 16-, or 32-point densities for
greater flexibility in your application. A point is the termination where a wire
attaches to the I/O module from a device. The I/O gets information from the
device to this designated point, thus signaling when activity occurs.
Electronic Fusing
Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to prevent
too much current from flowing through the module. This feature protects the
module from electrical damage. Other modules require external fusing.
Modules that use electronic fusing are fused on either a per point basis or per
group basis to protect output points from the surge of too much current. If too
much current begins to flow through a point, the fuse is tripped and a point-
level fault is sent to the controller. A corresponding tag can be examined in the
event of a fault. For more information about fault tags, see Appendix B.
These modules use electronic fusing:

• 1756-OA8E
• 1756-OB8EI
• 1756-OA8D
• 1756-OB16D
• 1756-OB16E
• 1756-OV16E
• 1756-OV32E
• 1756-OB16IEF
• 1756-OB16IEFS
Refer to Table 4 to determine what fuse to use in your application. If your

module does not support fusing, you can use a fused IFM to protect outputs.
See publication 1492-TD008.
Table 4 - Recommended Fuses
Circuit Type Cat. No. Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier
AC 1756-OA8(1) None—Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs (9)
5x20mm SAN-O Industry Corp.
6.3A Medium lag (SOC) p/n
MT 4-6.3A
1756-OA8D(2) (3) Yes—Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused
1756-OA8E(2) (3)
1756-OA16(1) (4) (5) Yes—Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm Littelfuse p/n
3.15A Slo-Blow H2153.15
1500A Interruption current
1756-OA16I(1) None—Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs(9) 5x20mm SOC p/n
6.3A Medium lag MT 4-6.3A
1756-ON8

Table 4 - Recommended Fuses (continued)

Circuit Type Cat. No. Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier
(6) (9)
DC 1756-OB8 None—Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs 5x20mm SOC p/n
4A Quick acting MQ2-4A
1756-OB81(6)
1756-OB8EI(2) (3) (6) Yes—Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused
(2) (3) (7)
1756-OB16D
1756-OB16E(2) (3) (6) Yes—Fused on a per group basis
1756-OB16I(6) (8) None—Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs(9) 5x20mm SOC p/n
1756-OB16IEF(2) (3) (6) Yes—Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused
(2) (3) (6)
1756-OB16IEFS
1756-OB16IS(6) (8) None—Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs(9) 5x20mm SOC p/n
1756-OB32(6) (8) 5x20mm Littelfuse p/n
800mA SP001.1003 or
Schurter p/n
216.800
1756-OC8(6) 5x20mm SOC p/n
1756-OG16(6)
1756-OH8I(6) (8)
1756-OV16E(2) (3) (6) Yes—Fused on a per group basis Electronically fused
1756-OV32E(2) (3) (6)
Relay 1756-OW16I(8) None—Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs(9) 5x20mm SOC p/n
6.3A Medium lag MT 4-6.3A
1756-OX8I(8)
(1) For voltages above 132V AC, the Interface Modules (IFM) are not an acceptable means to provide external fusing. A rated terminal block for the intended application must be used.
(2) Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses, circuit breakers, or other code-required wiring protection devices.
(3) The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short-circuit conditions. The protection is based on a thermal cut-out principle. In the event of a
short-circuit condition on an output channel, that channel limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut-out temperature has been reached. All other channels with a NUT of that group
continue to operate as directed by the module master (CPU, bridge, and so forth).
(4) A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of two fuses. The fuses are designed to protect the module from short circuit conditions. The fuse does not provide overload protection. In
the event of an overload on an output channel, it is likely that the fuse does not blow and the output device associated with that channel is damaged. To provide overload protection for your
application, install user-supplied fuses externally.
(5) If a short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module group, the entire group is turned Off.
(6) The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources.
(7) The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short-circuit conditions. The protection is based on a thermal cut-out principle. In the event of a
short-circuit condition on an output channel, that channel limits the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut-out temperature has been reached. Other channels could produce a false error on
the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19.2V DC. The output channels that are affected by this phenomena continues to operate as directed by the
module master (CPU, bridge, and so forth). What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels must be checked and reset if a short-circuit on one channel occurs.
(8) The recommended fuse for this module has been sized to provide short circuit protection for wiring only to external loads. In the event of a short circuit on an output channel, it is likely that the
transistor or relay associated with that channel is damaged and the module can be replaced or a spare output channel used for the load. The fuse does not provide overload protection. In the event of
an overload on an output channel, it is likely that the fuse does not blow and the transistor or relay associated with that channel is damaged. To provide overload protection for your application, user
supplied fuse can be installed externally and properly sized to match the individual load characteristics.
(9) The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs (1756-TBCH, 1756-TBNH, 1756-TBSH and 1756-TBS6H). Any application that requires agency certification of the
ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency.

You can reset an electronic fuse through the Logix Designer application during
online monitoring or through program logic running on a controller. If your
module uses point-level fusing, you can reset a fuse with a CIP Generic
Message instruction, as described on page 225.
Follow these steps to reset an electronic fuse through the Logix Designer
application during online monitoring.
1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Diagnostics tab.

The fields on the Diagnostic tab vary depending on whether your
module supports fusing on a per point basis or a per group basis.
Fusing on a per group basis
Fusing on a per point basis
2. Click Reset for the output points for which to reset a fuse.
3. Click OK.

Field Power Loss Detection
For the standard digital output modules, the Field Power Loss detection
feature is found on the 1756-OA8E module only. When field power to the
module is lost, or zero cross cannot be detected, a point-level fault is sent to the
controller to identify the exact point faulted.
IMPORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use. If this
feature is enabled for points that are not in use, you receive faults for those
points during operation.
This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program
in the event of a fault. For information on these tags, see Appendix B.
Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostics for field power loss.
2. Do one of the following in the Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss
column:
• To enable field power loss detection for a specific point, check the
corresponding check box.
• To disable field loss detection for a specific point, clear the
corresponding checkbox.
3. Click OK.

Diagnostic Latch of Information
The diagnostic latch feature is available for the 1756-OA8E modules only.
Diagnostic latching lets this module latch a fault in the set position once it has
been triggered, even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears.
Follow these steps to enable diagnostic latch of information.
2. Do one of the following in Enable Diag. Latching column:

• To enable diagnostic latching for a specific point, check the
• To disable diagnostic latching for a specific point, clear the
3. Click OK.

Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by using these methods:

• Reset Diagnostic Latch service
• Software reset during online monitoring
• Cycling power to the module
Follow these steps to a reset a latched fault through the Logix Designer
application during online monitoring.
1. On the Modules Properties screen, click the Diagnostics tab.
2. In the Reset Latched Diagnostics column, click Reset next to the output
point for which to reset a latched fault.
3. Click OK.

Time-scheduled Output Control
Time-scheduled output control is available for these modules:
• 1756-OB16IS—Provides time-scheduled output control in CST time

for outputs 0…7. Enables schedules with a minimum interval of 100 µs.
• 1756-OB16IEFS—Provides time-scheduled output control in CIP

Sync time for outputs 0…15. Enables schedules with a minimum interval
of 5 µs.
By using the time-scheduled output control feature, the module can turn the
outputs On or Off at a scheduled time. You can set the time for the output to
turn On or Off in program logic. The modules manage the time locally, so that
the output is turned On or Off at the specified time.
MAOC Instructions with Time-scheduled Output Control
The Motion Axis Output Cam (MAOC) instruction provides position-based

control of outputs by using position and velocity information of any motion
axis. When the 1756-OB16IS or 1756-OB16IEFS module is specified as the
output destination for the MAOC instruction, the MAOC instruction
automatically handles time-based scheduling for outputs. The benefit of using
output scheduling in this manner is that the resolution of the output control is
improved from the motion coarse update rate (typically 1…32 ms) to 100 µs for
outputs 0…7 on the 1756-OB16IS module and 10 µs for outputs 0…15 on the
1756-OB16IEFS module.
You can also use outputs 8…15 on the 1756-OB16IS module with the MAOC
instruction. However, only outputs 0…7 have 100 µs resolution. Outputs 8…15
are updated at the motion coarse update rate.
For more information about using the MAOC instruction with scheduled
output modules, refer to the Position-based Output Control with the
MAOC Instruction Application Technique, publication 1756-AT017.
Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping
When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I/O

modules, these conditions can occur depending on the major revision of the
module:
• If the module has a Major Revision = 1 (unless a 1756-IB16IF,

1756-IB16ISOE, or 1756-IH16ISOE module), it always returns a
positive timestamping value.
• If the module has a Major Revision > 2 or is a 1756-IB16IF,

1756-IB16ISOE, or 1756-IH16ISOE module, it returns a negative
timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner-
controller and the first change of state condition occurs.

Use the Module Properties dialog box in Logix Designer to determine if the
module has been synchronized with the owner-controller and whether the
controller is synchronized with the CST. For more information on
synchronizing owner-controllers and modules with the CST, see the
ControlLogix System User Manual, publication 1756-UM001.
Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault and status data to any
owner-controller or listening controller. All input modules maintain a module-
between Input Modules and fault word, the highest level of fault reporting.
Controllers
The table lists the fault word and the associated tag that can be examined in
program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard input
module.
Table 5 - Fault Word on Input Modules
Word Tag Name Description
Module-fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting. Available on all digital input
modules.
All words are 32-bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for the
density of each module are used. For example, the 1756-IA16I module has a
module-fault word of 32 bits. But, because this is a 16-point module, only 16
bits (0…15) are used in the module-fault word.
Table 6 - Bits Set in Module-fault Word
Condition Bits Set
Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1, regardless of the module density.
This illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on

ControlLogix standard digital input modules.
Bit 31 Bit 0
Module-fault Word
All Modules
A communication fault sets all bits in the module-fault word. 42676

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any
owner-controller or listening controller. Like input modules, output modules
between Output Modules maintain a module-fault word, the highest level of fault reporting. However,
and Controllers some output modules use additional words to indicate fault conditions.
The table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in
program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard output
module.
Table 7 - Fault Words on Output Modules
Module-fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting. Available on all digital output
modules.
Fuse blown FuseBlown Indicates a point/group fuse blown on the module. Available only on
1756-OA16, 1756-OA8D, 1756-OA8E, 1756-OB16D, 1756-OB16E,
1756-OB16EIF, 1756-OB8EI, 1756-OV16E, and 1756-OV32E modules.
For more information, see Electronic Fusing on page 51.
Field power loss FieldPwrLoss Indicates a loss of field power to a point on the module. Available on
the 1756-OA8E module only. For more information, see Field Power
Loss Detection on page 54.
All words are 32-bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for the
density of each module are used. For example, the 1756-OB8 module has a
module-fault word of 32 bits. But, because this is a eight-point module, only
the first eight bits (0…7) are used in the module-fault word.
Fault bits in the fuse blown word and field power loss word are logically
entered into the module-fault word. Depending on the module type, a bit set
in the module-fault word can mean multiple things, as indicated in Table 8.
Condition Bits Set
Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1, regardless of the module density.
Fuse blown
Only the bit affected is set to 1.
Field power loss


ControlLogix digital output modules.
Bit 31 Bit 0
Module-fault Word
All modules 1 1
A communications fault sets all bits in the module-fault word. A fuse blown or
field power loss condition sets the appropriate bits in the module-fault word.
Group 1 Group 0
Fuse Blown Word
Point Level Group Level
1756-OA8D 1756-OA16 1
1756-OA8E 1756-OB16E
1756-OB8EI 1756-OV16E A blown fuse for any point or group sets the bit for that point or group in the
1756-OB16D 1756-OV32E fuse blown word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module-fault word.
Group 1 Group 0
Field Power Loss Word

1756-OA8E only 1
A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the field power 41457
loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module-fault word.
Fuse Blown Bit per Point
Fuse Blown bit per point applies to catalog numbers 1756-OB16IEF and
1756-OB16IEFS. Figure 8 shows Pt[0] and Pt[1] expanded to show Pt[0].Fault – a
separate fault bit appears for each of Pt[0]…[15].
Figure 8 - Fuse Blown Words

Chapter 4
Diagnostic Module Features
Topic Page
Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 61
Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 62
Diagnostic Features 62
Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 65
Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 69
Diagnostic modules provide additional reporting information to the

controller, such as a timestamp of the time a module fault occurs or clears, no
load detection, and pulse tests. The table lists the available diagnostic digital
I/O modules.
Cat. No. Description
1756-IA8D 79…132V AC 8-point diagnostic input module
1756-IB16D 10…30V DC diagnostic input module
1756-OA8D 74…132V AC 8-point diagnostic output module
1756-OB16D 19.2…30V DC 16-point diagnostic output module
Diagnostic Input When designing systems with ControlLogix® diagnostic input modules,
consider these factors:
Module Compatibility
• Current leakage
• Whether you need a solid state device
• Whether your application needs to use sinking or sourcing wiring

Chapter 4 Diagnostic Module Features
Diagnostic Output ControlLogix diagnostic output modules are capable of directly driving the
ControlLogix diagnostic digital inputs. When diagnostics are used, a shunt
Module Compatibility resistor is required for leakage current.
For more information on the compatibility of motor starters with

ControlLogix output modules, see Appendix E.
Diagnostic Features This table lists features common to all ControlLogix diagnostic digital I/O
modules. Diagnostic I/O modules also have the common module features
described in Chapter 3.
Topic Page
Diagnostic Latch of Information 62
Diagnostic Timestamp 63
8-Point AC/16-Point DC 64
Point-level Fault Reporting 64
Diagnostic Latch of Information
Diagnostic latching lets diagnostic I/O modules latch a fault in the set position
once it has been triggered, even if the error condition causing the fault to occur
disappears.
The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you set
diagnostic latching to occur for a specific point where the field device is wired
to the I/O module.
Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostic latching.

Diagnostic Module Features Chapter 4
2. Do one of the following in the Enable Diag. Latching column:

• To enable diagnostic latching for a specific point, check the
• To disable diagnostic latching for a specific point, clear the
3. Click OK.
Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by using these methods:

• Reset Diagnostic Latch service
• Software reset during online monitoring
• Cycling power to the module
Follow these steps to a reset a latched fault through Logix Designer during
online monitoring.
1. On the Modules Properties screen, click the Diagnostics tab.
2. Click Reset next to the point for which to reset a latched fault.
3. Click OK.
Diagnostic Timestamp
Diagnostic I/O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs or when
it clears. This feature provides greater accuracy and flexibility in running
applications. Modules use the ControlLogix system clock from a local
controller to generate timestamps.
To use diagnostic timestamps, you must choose the appropriate

communication format during initial configuration. For more information, see
To configure features specific to fast modules, see Chapter 5. on page 130.

8-Point AC/16-Point DC
Diagnostic I/O modules provide various grouping of points on different

modules. The eight-point AC modules and 16-point DC modules provide
additional flexibility when designing module applications. The greater number
of points lets more field devices be attached to I/O modules to boost efficiency.
Point-level Fault Reporting

Diagnostic I/O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred on a
point-by-point basis. These fault conditions generate their own unique fault
bits.
Table 9 - Unique Fault Bits for I/O Points
Input Points Output Points
These conditions can set a fault bit for an input point: These conditions can set a fault bit for an output point:
• Open wire • Fuse blown
• Field power loss (1756-IA8D only) • No load
• Output verify
• Field power loss (1756-IA8D only)
Using these bits in tandem with data echo and manually performing a pulse test
can help to further isolate the fault. Table 10 lists possible diagnostic faults on
the 1756-OA8D module.
Table 10 - 1756-OA8D Point-level Fault Scenarios
Ladder commands output to be On Ladder commands output to be Off Possible cause of fault
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off.(4) Output is shorted to L2.
2. Fuse Blown bit is set. 2. Pulse Test fails.
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On. 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. No Load or output is shorted to L1.
2. Pulse Test fails.(1) 2. No Load bit is off.
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. L1 or L2 are disconnected or outside the 47-63 Hz
2. No Load shows a fault. 2. No Load bit is set. frequency range.
3. Field Power Loss shows a fault. 3. Field Power Loss is set.
4. Pulse Test fails. 4. Pulse Test fails.
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On.(2) 1. Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. Hardware point damage.(5)
2. Output Verify bit is set.(3) 2. Pulse Test fails.
(1) When pulse test is executed, it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display.
(2) The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage.
(3) Depending on the characteristics of an applied short-circuit, an output verify fault could be set until the short- circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off.
(4) It is not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state. If a short-circuit occurs, the output point is turned Off and the fault appears in the Off state until the point is reset.
(5) During normal operating conditions, hardware damage is not possible. An output shorted to L2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault. See output shorted to L2 as a possible cause.

Table 11 lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756-OB16D module.

Table 11 - 1756-OB16D Point-level Fault Scenarios
Ladder commands output to be On Ladder commands output to be Off Possible cause of fault
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off.(4) Output is shorted to GND.
2. Fuse Blown bit is set.(1) 2. Pulse Test fails.(5)
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On. 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. One of the following could be the cause.
2. Pulse Test fails 2. No Load bit is set.
3. Pulse Test passes. 1. No Load.
2. Output shorted to DC+.
3. No power at module.
1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On.(2) 1. Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off. Hardware point damage.(6)
2. Output Verify sets a bit.(3) 2. Pulse Test fails.
(1) The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short-circuit conditions. The protection is based on a thermal cutout principal. In the event of a
short-circuit condition on an output channel, that channel limits the current within milliseconds after its thermal cutout temperature has been reached. Other channels could produce a false error on
the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19.2V DC. The output channels that are affected by this phenomena continues to operate as directed by the
module master (CPU, bridge, and so forth). What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels must be checked and reset if a short-circuit on one channel occurs.
(2) The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage.
(3) Depending on the characteristics of an applied short-circuit, an output verify fault could be set until the short- circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off.
(4) It is not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state. If a short-circuit occurs, the point is turned Off and the fault appears in the Off state until that point is reset.
(5) When the pulse test is executed, it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display.
(6) During normal operating conditions, hardware damage is not possible. An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault. See output shorted to GND as a possible cause.
Features Specific to This table lists features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital input
modules.
Diagnostic Input Modules
Topic Page
Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 65
Open Wire Detection 67
Field Power Loss Detection 68
Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules
If the diagnostic change of state feature is enabled, a diagnostic input module

sends new data to the owner-controller when one of the events described in the
table occurs.
Event Description
RPI A user-defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its
owner-controller. This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer.
Change of State Configurable feature that, when enabled, instructs the module to update its
owner-controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from
On to Off and Off to On. The data is sent at the RPI rate where there is no change of
state. By default, this setting is always enabled for input modules.
Diagnostic Change of State Information updates when any change in the diagnostics for an input module
occurs.

Although the RPI occurs continuously, the COS feature lets you decide
whether changes in a module’s diagnostic detection cause the module to send
real-time data to the owner-controller.
2. Do the following in the Enable Change of State column:

• To enable the input module to send new data to the owner-controller
at the RPI, on input COS if it is enabled, and if a diagnostic fault
occurs, check the corresponding Off → On or On →Off checkbox for
a point.
• To disable the feature, clear the corresponding checkbox for a point.
Real-time data is not sent when a diagnostic fault occurs but is still
sent at the specified RPI or on input COS if it is enabled.
3. Click OK.

Open Wire Detection
Open Wire is used to verify the field wiring is connected to the module. The
field device must provide a minimum leakage current to function properly.
A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device. The
resulting current is then expected to exist when the input is open. For more
information, see each module’s specifications in Chapter 8.
When an Open Wire condition is detected, a point-level fault is sent to the

controller to identify the exact point fault. This feature has a corresponding tag
that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault.
Follow these steps to configure open wire detection.
2. Do one of the following in the Open Wire (middle) column:

• To enable the open wire detection for a specific point, check the
• To disable open wire detection for a specific point, clear the
3. Click OK.

Field Power Loss Detection
For the standard digital output modules, the Field Power Loss detection
feature is found on the 1756-IA8D module only. When field power to the
module is lost, or zero cross cannot be detected, a point-level fault is sent to the
controller to identify the exact point faulted.
IMPORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use. If this
feature is enabled for points that are not in use, you receive faults for those
points during operation.
in the event of a fault. For information on these tags, see Chapter A.
Follow these steps to enable or disable diagnostics for field power loss.
2. Do one of the following in the Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss
column:
• To enable field power loss detection for a specific point, check the
• To disable field loss detection for a specific point, clear the
3. Click OK.

Features Specific to This table lists features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital output
modules.
Diagnostic Output Modules
Topic Page
Field Wiring Options 69
No Load Detection 69
Field-side Output Verification 71
Pulse Test 72
Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 73
Field Wiring Options
As with diagnostic input modules, ControlLogix diagnostic output modules

provide isolated or nonisolated wiring options. I/O modules provide point-to-
point, group-to-group, or channel-to-channel wiring isolation.
Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and

which output module to use.
IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix diagnostic I/O modules provide nonisolated,

field-side wiring options, each I/O module maintains internal electrical
isolation between the system side and field side.
No Load Detection
For each output point, no load detection senses the absence of field wiring or a
missing load from each output point in the Off state only.
The output circuit on a diagnostic output module has a current sensing

optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor. Current flows through
this sensing circuit only when the output is Off, as shown in the simplified
diagram.
V+
Current
Sense
Current Flow with Output Current Flow with
Output On Transistor Output Off
Load
41681

Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification

(1756-OA8D = 10 mA & 1756-OB16D = 3 mA). In the On state, the module
must be connected to a load that draws a minimum current equal to these
values.
If a connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load current

specification, diagnostic output modules are capable of sensing current through
the optoisolator and the load when the output point is Off.
Follow these steps to enable no load detection.
2. Do one of the following in the No Load column:

• To enable the feature for a specific point, check the corresponding
checkbox.
• To disable the feature for a specific point, clear the corresponding
checkbox.
3. Click OK.
in the event of a fault. For more information on these tags, see Appendix B.

Field-side Output Verification
Field-side output verification informs you that logic-side instructions

consumed by the module are accurately represented on the power side of a
switching device. For each output point, this feature confirms that the output is
On when it is commanded to be On.
The diagnostic output module can tell a controller that it received a command
and whether the field-side device connected to the module has executed the
command. For example, in applications that need to verify that the module has
accurately followed the processor’s instructions, the module samples the field-
side state and compares it to the system-side state.
in the event of a fault. For more information on these tags, see Appendix B.
If an output cannot be verified, a point-level fault is sent to the controller.
Follow these steps to enable the field-side output verification.
2. Do one of the following in the Output Verify column:

• To enable the feature for a specific point, check the corresponding
checkbox.
• To disable the feature for a specific point, clear the corresponding
checkbox.
3. Click OK.

Pulse Test
Pulse test is a feature found on diagnostic output modules that can verify
output-circuit functionality without actually changing the state of the output
load device. A short pulse is sent to the targeted output circuit. The circuit
responds as if a real change-of-state command was issued, but the load device
does not transition.
See page 225 in Appendix C for instructions on performing a pulse test with a
CIP Generic Message instruction.
TIP Consider the following when using the pulse test:

• Only use the test when the output state does not transition for long
periods of time. Normal diagnostics catch faults if the outputs are
transitioning regularly.
• When first performing the pulse test, verify that the load does not
transition. Be at the actual load while the test is performed.
The table explains how a pulse test can be used to perform a preemptive
diagnosis of possible future module conditions.
Objective Pulse Test Description
Detect a blown fuse before The Blown Fuse diagnostic can be used only when an output module is in the On
it happens state. However, you can use a pulse test when an output module is in an Off state to
determine whether operating conditions may cause a blown fuse.
When you perform a pulse test on a module in the Off state, the output point is
commanded to be On briefly. Although no diagnostic bits are set in the output data
echo, the pulse test reports a failure if the conditions when the point is On indicate a
blown fuse may occur. See Point-level Fault Reporting on page 64.
IMPORTANT The pulse test does not guarantee failure of a fuse
when the output point turns On. It merely indicates a
blown fuse is possible.
Detect a No Load condition No Load detection can only detect a fault when an output point is in the Off state.
with an output On However, you can use a pulse test when an output module is in an On state to
determine whether operating conditions for a point may cause a No Load condition.
If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the On state, the output
point is commanded to be Off briefly. The pulse test reports a failure because
conditions when the point is Off indicate the possible absence of a field device; in this
case, though, the No Load bit is not set. See Point-level Fault Reporting on page 64.
IMPORTANT The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a
load. It merely indicates a No Load condition is
possible.

Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules
If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled, a diagnostic output

module sends new data to the owner-controller when one of the events
described in the table occurs.
Table 12 - Diagnostic Change of State Events
Event Description
Receipt of output data Output module sends data when it echoes back to the owner-controller.
Diagnostic change of state Output module sends data when any change in the diagnostics output point
occurs.
Unlike diagnostic input modules, this feature cannot be disabled for diagnostic
output modules. There is no Enable Change of State for Diagnostic
Transitions checkbox on the Configuration tab to check or clear for diagnostic
output modules.
Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault and status data
to any owner-controller or listening controller. All diagnostic input modules
between Input Modules and maintain a module-fault word, the highest level of fault reporting. Some
Controllers modules use additional words to indicate fault conditions.
Table 13 lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in
program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic input
module.
Table 13 - Fault Words on Diagnostic Input Modules
Module-fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting. Available on all digital input
modules.
Field Power Loss FieldPwrLoss Indicates loss of field power to a group on the module. Available on
the 1756-IA8D only.
For more information, see Field Power Loss Detection on page 68.
Open Wire OpenWire Indicates the loss of a wire from a point on the module. For more
information, see Open Wire Detection on page 67.
All words are 32-bit, although only the number of bits appropriate for each
module’s density are used. For example, the 1756-IA16I module has a module-
fault word of 32 bits. But, because this is a 16-point module, only the first 16
bits (0…15) are used in the module-fault word.

Fault bits in the field-power loss word and open wire word are logically entered
into the module-fault word. Depending on the module type, a bit set in the
module-fault word can mean multiple things, as indicated in the table.
Condition Bits Set
Communications fault All 32 bits are set to 1, regardless of the module’s density.
Field-power loss
Open wire
This illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital
input modules.
Bit 31 Bit 0
Module-fault Word
All modules 1 1
A communications fault sets all bits in the module-fault word. A field-power loss
or open wire condition sets the appropriate bit in the module -fault word.
Group 1 Group 0
Field Power Loss Word
1756-IA8D only 1
A loss of field power sets the bit for that group in the field-power loss
word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module-fault word.
Open Wire Word 1
An open wire condition on any point sets the bit for that point in the open
wire word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module-fault word.
41456

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules multicast fault and status data
to any owner-controller or listening controller. Like input modules, output
between Output Modules modules maintain a module-fault word, the highest level of fault reporting.
and Controllers However, some output modules use additional words to indicate fault
conditions.
The table lists the fault words and the associated tags that can be examined in
program logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic output
module.
Table 15 - Fault Words on Diagnostic Output Modules
Module-fault Fault Provides fault summary reporting. Available on all digital output
modules.
Fuse Blown FuseBlown Indicates a blown fuse for a point on the module. For more information,
see For more information, see Electronic Fusing on page 53.
No Load NoLoad Indicates a loss of a load from a point on the module. For more
information, see No Load Detection on page 69.
Output Verify OutputVerify Indicates when an output is not performing as commanded by the
owner-controller. For more information, see Field-side Output
Verification on page 71.
module’s density are used. For example, the 1756-OB8 module has a module-
fault word of 32 bits. But, because the module is an 8-point module, only the
first 8 bits (0…7) are used in the module-fault word.
Fault bits in the fuse blown word, field-power loss word, no load word and
output verify word are logically entered into the module-fault word.
Depending on the module type, a bit set in the module-fault word can mean
multiple things, as indicated in the table.
Condition Bits Set
Communication fault All 32 bits are set to 1, regardless of the module’s density.
Fuse blown
Field-power loss
No load
Output verify

output modules.
Bit 31 Bit 0
Module-fault Word 1 1 1 1
A communications fault sets all bits in the module-fault word. A fuse blown,
field-power loss, no load or output verify condition sets the appropriate bit in
the module-fault word.
Fuse Blown Word 1
A blown fuse for any point sets the bit for that point in the fuse blown word and
also sets the appropriate bits in the module-fault word.
Group 1 Group 0
Field-power Loss Word

1
1756-OA8D only
A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the field-power
loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module-fault word.
No Load Word 1
A no load condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the no
load word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module-fault word.
Output Verify Word 1
An output verify condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the output
verify word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module-fault word.
41457

Chapter 5
Fast Module Features
Topic Page
Fast Input Module Compatibility 77
Fast Output Module Compatibility 78
Fast Features 78
Features Specific to Fast Input Modules 79
Features Specific to Fast Output Modules 89
Redundant Owners 102
Fast digital I/O modules provide quick response time for high-speed control
applications. The table lists the available fast digital I/O modules.
Cat. No. Description
1756-IB16IF 10…30V DC,16-point, isolated, fast peer control input module
1756-OB16IEF 10…30V DC,16-point, isolated, fast peer control output module
1756-OB16IEFS 10…30V DC, 16-point, isolated, fast, scheduled per point output module
Fast Input Module When designing systems with ControlLogix® fast input modules, consider
these factors:
Compatibility
• Sensor performance and specifications
• Whether your application uses sinking or sourcing wiring

Chapter 5 Fast Module Features
Fast Output Module ControlLogix fast output modules can be used to drive a variety of output
devices. Typical output devices compatible with ControlLogix outputs include
Compatibility these items:
• Solenoids
• Indicators
Follow these guidelines when designing a system:
• Make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge
and continuous current for proper operation.
• Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded.
Damage to the module could result.
When sizing output loads, refer to the documentation supplied with the
output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the
device.
Outputs on fast output modules can be directly wired to inputs on fast input
modules.
Fast Features Module features include all the common features described in Chapter 3, as
well the extended capabilities described within this chapter.
For higher-speed control, the 1756-OB16IEF output module can be

configured to receive input status over the backplane directly from the
1756-IB16IF input module or 1756-LSC8XIB8I counter module without
controller processing. This feature, know as peer ownership, is described in the
ControlLogix Peer Ownership Application Technique, publication
1756-AT016.
IMPORTANT To configure the modules, you must have the following:

• The 1756-OB16IEF and 1756-OB16IEFS modules requires Studio 5000®
environment, version 21.00.00 or later.
• The Add-on Profile (AOP) for each module available for download at
http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp.

Fast Module Features Chapter 5
Response Time
Table 17 indicate the screw-to-backplane response time of fast input and fast
output modules.
Table 17 - Input Response Time
Delay Response Time
Total On/Off delay (screw to backplane) 14 μs nom/23 μs max + user-configurable filter time
Hardware delay < 1 μs nom, 2 μs max
Firmware delay 13 μs nom, 21 μs max
User-configurable filter time 0…30,000 μs
Table 18 - Output Response Time

Delay Response Time
Total On/Off delay (screw to backplane) 14 μs nom/23 μs max
Hardware delay < 1 μs nom, 2 μs max
Firmware delay 13 μs nom, 21 μs max
Features Specific to This table lists features specific to ControlLogix fast digital input modules.
Fast Input Modules Topic Page
Pulse Capture 80
Per Point Timestamping and Change of State 81
Software Configurable Filter Times 84
Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks 87
IMPORTANT Output tag information is sent to the 1756-IB16IF module only at the RPI
rate defined during configuration. For optimal performance, use an
Immediate Output (IOT) instruction.
For example, the rung shown contains an IOT instruction for a fast input
module in slot 3. Add a similar rung to your last routine within the Main Task
to mimic normal output tag processing.

Pulse Capture
The 1756-IB16IF fast input module can be used to detect or latch short
duration pulses. The module can detect incoming pulses with a duration as
short as 10 µs if the frequency is under 4 kHz (period of 250 µs).
When the module detects a short duration pulse at an input point, it sets the
corresponding bit for the Pt[x].NewDataOffOn or Pt[x].NewDataOnOff
input tag. This bit remains latched until acknowledged. As a result, you can use
this bit to detect a transition that is too fast to be detected by the program scan.
You can also determine how rapid the transition was by configuring the
module to latch timestamps for the point, as described in Per Point
Timestamping and Change of State on page 81.
To acknowledge the last captured pulse and reset the pulse latch, you set the
rising edge of the corresponding bit in these output tags:
• Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck—Acknowledges that the input point has

transitioned to an On state and resets the pulse latch.
• Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck—Acknowledges that the input point has

transitioned to an Off state and resets the pulse latch.
You can change output tag values in program logic while normal module
operation continues or through the Logix Designer tag editor. For more
information about module tags, refer to Appendix B.
Once a pulse latch is reset for an input point, the next pulse at that point sets
the corresponding bit in the Pt[x].NewDataOffOn or Pt[x].NewDataOnOff
input tags.

Per Point Timestamping and Change of State
With per point timestamping, each input point on the module records
timestamps in CIP Sync format at these speeds:
• ± 4 µs for inputs < 4 kHz
• ± 13 µs for inputs > 4 kHz
IMPORTANT Timestamping functions only in a CIP Sync system. If you are using change
of state (COS) in a system using Coordinated System Time (CST), all
timestamp values and the GrandMasterClockID input tag are set to zero.
To set up CIP Sync time synchronization on the local controller, use the
Date/Time tab in the controller properties. For more information about CIP
Sync configuration, refer to the Integrated Architecture® and CIP Sync
Configuration Application Technique, publication IA-AT003.
You can configure an input point to record a timestamp when the point
transitions from On to Off, Off to On, or in both directions. By default, all
points are configured to record a timestamp in both directions.
You can also configure the module to latch timestamps for an input point’s last
transition. When latching is enabled for a specific point, the point records a
timestamp in the Pt[x].Timestamp.OffOn or Pt[x].Timestamp.OnOff input
tags. The timestamp remains latched, and no new timestamps are recorded for
the input point until the timestamp is acknowledged and reset. As a result, you
can use the timestamp to determine the speed of a transition that is too fast to
be detected by the program scan.
To acknowledge a transition and reset a timestamp latch, you set the

corresponding bit in these output tags:
• Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck—Acknowledges that the input point has

transitioned to an On state and resets the timestamp latch.
• Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck—Acknowledges that the input point has

transitioned to an Off state and resets the timestamp latch.
The Pt[x].TimestampDropped input tag indicates whether a new timestamp

has not been recorded because a previous timestamp was either latched or
unacknowledged.
Once a timestamp latch is reset for an input point, a new timestamp may be
recorded in the Pt[x].Timestamp.OffOn or Pt[x].Timestamp.OnOff input
tags upon the next transition.
You can configure per point timestamping in three ways:

• Timestamping enabled without latching (default configuration)
• Timestamping enabled with latching
• Timestamping disabled

Follow these steps to configure per point timestamping and enable COS.
1. On the New Module dialog box, click Change to display the Module
Definition dialog box.
Opens the Module Definition dialog box.
2. Use this table to choose a connection format and input data type from
the Connection and Input Data pull-down menus.
IMPORTANT To enable timestamping, choose Timestamp Data as the input data type.
Connection Format Input Data Data Return

Data Timestamp Data Module returns input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync
system time.
Data Module returns input data without COS timestamps. This format
is useful when the highest possible throughput is required, and
timestamps are not required.
Data with Event Timestamp Data Results in two input connections:
• Connection to return input data with COS timestamps in CIP
Sync system time.
• Connection to initiate event tasks. See page 87.
Listen Only Timestamp Data These formats have the same definition as those above except that
they are Listen-only connections.
Data
Listen Only with Event Timestamp Data
TIP You can change the connection format at any time after creating a new
module except when you are online. The AOP applies all the configuration
data and create the tags required for the new connection format.

3. On the New Module or Module Properties dialog box, click the

Configuration tab.
Timestamp fields only appear on the Configuration tab when you
choose Timestamp Data from the Input Data pull-down menu on the
Module Definition dialog box.
4. Complete the fields as described in the table and click OK.

Field Description Configuration Tag
Enable COS/Timestamps To enable COS and timestamping for an Off to On transition Pt[x].COSOffOnEn
Off → On for a point, check the corresponding checkbox.
To disable COS and timestamping for an Off to On transition
for a point, clear the corresponding checkbox.
Enable COS/Timestamps To enable COS and timestamping for an On to Off transition Pt[x].COSOnOffEn
On → Off for a point, check the corresponding checkbox.
To disable COS and timestamping for an On to Off transition
for a point, clear the corresponding checkbox.
Latch Timestamps Check the checkbox to latch a CIP Sync timestamp for a COS LatchTimestamps
transition:
• When an initial timestamp is latched, timestamps for
subsequent COS transitions are dropped.
• Once a latched timestamp is acknowledged via the
corresponding bit in the Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck or
Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck tag, the timestamp is overridden
upon the next COS transition.
IMPORTANT: Timestamps are latched only for points that are
enabled for COS and timestamping.
5. If you checked the Latch Timestamps checkbox, use program logic or

the Logix Designer tag editor to acknowledge transitions and clear
latched timestamps via the Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck and
Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck output tags.
For more information about module tags, refer to Appendix B.

Software Configurable Filter Times
To account for hard contact bounce, you can configure Off-to-On and On-to-
Off input filter times of 0…30,000 µs in Logix Designer. These filters define
how long an input transition must remain in the new state before the module
considers the transition valid.
When an input transition occurs, the module timestamps the transition on the
edge of the transition and stores timestamp data for the transition. The module
then monitors the input for the duration of the filter time to verify that the
input remains in the new state:
• If the input remains in the new state for a time period equal to the filter
time, the input is recognized and recorded. The module sends
timestamp data for the transition and the input’s On/Off state to the
controller.
• If the input changes state again before the duration of the filter time has
elapsed, the module continues to scan that input for up to 10x the filter
time. During this continued scan period, one of these events occurs:
– In the time period that is 10x the duration of the filter time, the input
returns to the transitioned state for the duration of the filter time. In
this case, the module sends timestamp data from the initial transition
to the controller.
– In the time period that is 10x the duration of the filter time, the input
never remains in the transitioned state for the duration of the filter
time. In this case, the input is recognized, but the module does not
consider the original transition valid and drops the timestamp.
EXAMPLE A 1756-IB16IF module is configured for a 2 ms filter time for Off-to-On

transitions. In this example, three possible scenarios can result after an
input transitions from Off to On:
• Scenario 1—The input turns On and remains On for the full 2 ms filter
time. The module considers the transition valid and sends the data
recorded at the transition to the controller (Figure 9 on page 85).
• Scenario 2—The input turns On but turns Off before the 2 ms filter
time elapses. The module continues to monitor the input for 10x the
duration of the filter time. Within that time period, the input turns On
again and remains On for at least 2 ms. The module considers the
transition valid and sends the data timestamped at the original
transition to the controller (Figure 10 on page 85).
• Scenario 3—The input turns On but turns Off before the 2 ms filter
time elapses. The module continues to monitor the input for 10x the
duration of the filter time. Within that time period, the input never
remains On for at least 2 ms. The module considers the transition invalid
and drops the data timestamped at the original transition (Figure 11 on
page 85).

Figure 9 - Valid Transition with No Bounce
Input remains On for at least 2 ms. The transition is

considered valid, and the timestamp is sent to the controller.
Input turns On, and a
timestamp is recorded.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Time in milliseconds
Figure 10 - Transition Valid with Bounce
Input turns Off before 2 ms elapses. Input turns On and remains On for at least 2 ms in the
20 ms time period that is 10x the input filter time.
The module sends the timestamp recorded at the
Input turns On, and a original transition point (time 0) to the controller.
timestamp is recorded.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 11 - Invalid Transition

The input never remains
On for at least 2 ms. After the 20 ms time period that is 10x the input filter
Input turns Off before 2 ms elapses. time, the module drops the data recorded at the
original transition. If an RPI occurs during this time,
the module sends the controller its current valid input
Input turns On, and a data. The data that is sent does not include data from
timestamp is recorded. the transition because the input transition has not
cleared the filter and been recognized as a valid input.
The next time the input turns On, the module

records the transition as timestamp 21.6 once
the input passes the filter time.
0 1 2 3 4 … 17 18 19 20 21 22

Follow these steps to configure input filter times.

2. In the Input Filter Time column, enter Off to On and On to Off input
filter times from 0…30,000 µs and click OK.
3. Complete the fields as described in this table and click OK.

Field Description Configuration Tag
Enable Filter To enable filtering for a point, check the corresponding checkbox. Pt[x].FilterEn
To disable filtering for a point, clear the corresponding checkbox.
Input Filter Time Enter an Off to On input filter time from 0…30,000 μs. FilterOffOn
Off → On
Input Filter Time Enter an On to Off input filter time from 0…30,000 μs. FilterOnOff
On → Off

Dedicated Connection for Event Tasks
The 1756-IB16IF input module can initiate an event task over a dedicated
second connection in response to four user-defined input patterns. You can
define these patterns in real time during a control process by using these output
tags:
• Event[x].Mask—Defines which input points trigger the event task.
• Event[x].Value—Defines whether the masked input points must be in
the On or Off state before the event task is triggered.
Each pattern can use any of the module’s 16 input points, as shown in tables 19
through 22.
In example pattern 1, the input module triggers the event task when input
points 0…7 are in the On state.
Table 19 - Example Pattern 1
Output Tag Bit Position
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Event[x].Mask 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Event[x].Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x
points 0…7 are in the Off state.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Event[x].Mask 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Event[x].Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x
points 4, 6, 8, and 10 are in the On state.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Event[x].Mask 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Event[x].Value x x x x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1 x x x x x

points 0…3 are in the On state, and input points 12…15 are in the Off state.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Event[x].Mask 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Event[x].Value 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0
Once you define a pattern, you can disable an event from being triggered
without clearing its output data by using the Event[x].Disarm output tag.
IMPORTANT All event masks and event values must be defined in the output tags of the
module.
You can change output tag values in program logic while normal module
operation continues or through the Logix Designer tag editor. For more
information about module tags, refer to Appendix B.
To use a dedicated connection to trigger event tasks, you must set the module’s
connection format to Data with Event, as shown in Figure 12. For more
information about connection formats, see Communication or Connection
Formats on page 127.
TIP You can change the connection format at any time after creating a
new module except when you are online. The AOP applies all the
configuration data required for the new connection format.
Figure 12 - Event Connection Format
Choose Data with Event from the

Connection pull-down menu.
When you choose the Data with Event connection format, the following
occurs:
• A second connection dedicated to event data only is established with the
module. This dedicated event connection reduces controller overhead
when using inputs or input patterns to trigger event tasks in the
controller.
• A new set of event tags is created, as described in Table 46 on page 191.

Features Specific to This table lists features specific to ControlLogix fast digital output modules.
Fast Output Modules Topic Page
Programmable Fault State Delays 89
Pulse Width Modulation 91
Peer I/O Control (1756-OB16IEF only) See the Peer I/O Control Application Technique,
publication 1756-AT016.
Redundant Output See Redundant Owners on page 102.
IMPORTANT Output tag information is sent to the 1756-OB16IEF module only at the RPI
For example, the rung shown contains an IOT instruction for a fast output
Programmable Fault State Delays

You can define these states for an output point that is in Fault mode due to a
communication failure:
• Duration—Defines the length of time that the output remains in the

Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off. By
default, the output remains in the Fault mode state as long as the fault
condition persists.
• Final state—Defines whether the output transitions to the On or Off

state after the duration of the Fault mode state elapses. By default, the
output transitions to the Off state.
EXAMPLE You define a duration of 1 second and a final state of On for an output point.
If a fault occurs at that point, the output remains in its Fault mode state (Off,
On, or Hold) for 1 second before transitioning to the On state.
IMPORTANT If a connection is reestablished after an output point goes into Fault mode
but before the duration time elapses, the settings you specify for the
duration and final state no longer apply. For example, if you specify a 10
second duration and a final state of Off, and the fault ends in 3 seconds, the
output point never transitions to the final state of Off.
For more information about defining a Fault mode state, refer to Configurable
Point-level Output States on page 51.

Follow these steps to configure a fault state delay.
1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Points category.
2. Complete the fields as described in this table and click OK.

Field Description 1756-OB16IEF 1756-OB16IEFS
Configuration Tag Configuration Tag
Fault Mode Output State Choose the length of time you want the output to remain in Fault mode state Pt[x].FaultValueStateDuration FaultValueStateDuration
Duration before transitioning to the final state:
• 1 second
• 2 seconds
• 5 seconds
• 10 seconds
• Forever (default)
IMPORTANT: If you choose Forever, the output remains in the Fault mode
state until a connection is reestablished. For example, if the Fault mode is
Hold, and you specify a duration of Forever, then the output retains its Hold
state and does not transition to a Final state if a fault occurs.
Fault Mode Output State Choose whether you want the module to transition to an On or Off state after Pt[x].FaultFinalState FaultFinalState
Final State the Fault mode duration time elapses.
The default final state is Off. If you chose Forever, you cannot choose a final
state. The module retains its current Fault mode state.

Pulse Width Modulation
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) provides precise, onboard control of an

output’s pulse train with no program variability. To configure a PWM signal,
you define two real-time values for the pulse train in the module’s output tags:
• Cycle time—The duration of a pulse cycle in seconds from 1 ms…1

hour.
• On time—The pulse width, or length of time that a pulse is active

within a cycle from 200 µs…1 hour. You can define the On time in
seconds or as 0…100 percent of the cycle time. You may want to use a
steady-state On time, such as for gluing applications, or a dynamic On
time that is defined by program logic.
If the cycle time or On time is outside the valid range for an output, the
corresponding bit in the Fault input tag is set and the module responds as
described.
Condition Result
PWMCycleTime < minimum of 1ms PWMCycleTime = 1 ms
PWMCycleTime > maximum of 1 hour PWMCycleTime = 1 hour
PWMCycleTime ≤ PWMOnTime Output is always On
PWMOnTime < minimum of 200 μs Output is always Off
PWMOnTime > maximum of 1 hour PWMOnTime = 1 hour
If the cycle time or On time value changes while the output is generating a
PWM signal, the changes are not applied until the next cycle of the PWM
output. For instance, if the cycle time is erroneously set to an hour, a new cycle
time does not go into effect until the last cycle of the hour is complete. To
trigger the PWM output to restart immediately with a new cycle time or On
time, turn the output Off and then back On.
EXAMPLE If PWMOnTime is 0.1 second and PWMCycleTime is 1.0 second and the
PWMCycleTime is changed to 0.5 second just after the output turns On, the
output stays on for 0.1 second and then turns Off for 0.9 seconds to
complete the cycle before the new 0.5 second cycle begins.
IMPORTANT Before PWM functions, you must enable PWM during configuration and
define the PWM cycle time and On time in the PWMCycleTime and
PWMOnTime output tags.
If PWM is enabled (PWMEnable = 1) and the output is instructed to turn On
(Data = 1), the output generates a PWM signal.

Figure 13 compares two applications in which the output is instructed to turn

On for 4.5 seconds:
• In the application without PWM, a single pulse is generated. The pulse

remains active for the same length of time the Data output tag is On
(4.5 seconds).
• In the application with PWM, a series of pulses are generated. Each

pulse is active for a configured On time of .5 seconds or 50% of the 1
second cycle time. The Data output tag is On for 4.5 seconds.
Figure 13 - PWM
Application without PWM Application with PWM
Output Logic Output logic is On for 4.5 seconds. Output Logic Output logic is On for 4.5 seconds.
Output State Output is active for 4.5 seconds. Output State Each pulse is active for 0.5 seconds (On time)
1 Second
Cycle Time
By default, PWM is configured to continue the output pulse train until the
output logic turns Off. When the output logic turns Off, the output pulse train
immediately stops.
EXAMPLE In Figure 14, the output logic is On for 4.25 seconds and then turns Off in the
middle of the last pulse. Even though the PWM On time is configured for 0.5
seconds, the last pulse is only active for 0.25 seconds because it is truncated
when the output logic turns Off.
Figure 14 - PWM with Truncated Pulse
Output Logic Output logic is On for 4.25 seconds.
Output State
The last pulse is truncated when the output logic turns Off.

IMPORTANT The Program and Fault mode states configured for the module override the
PWM output state unless the point is configured to hold the last state while
in Program or Fault mode. If a point is configured to hold the last state and
the output is currently On, the output continues to use PWM until the PWM
cycle limit is reached, the module transitions out of Program or Fault mode,
or a final fault state goes into effect.
For more information, see the following:
• Configurable Point-level Output States on page 51
• Programmable Fault State Delays on page 89
• Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles on page 93
You can modify the default PWM configuration for each of a module’s 16
outputs for further control of an output’s pulse train, as described in PWM
Configuration on page 97.
Configuration options include the following:

• Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles
• Minimum On Time, Extend Cycle, and Stagger Output on page 94
Cycle Limit and Execute All Cycles
You can limit the number of pulse cycles that occur while an output is On. This
feature is useful when you want to apply a level of output control when a
process is stopped. For example, in a gluing application, you may want to apply
4 drops of glue to a product when the product is within a fixed window on a
conveyor belt. By configuring a cycle limit of 4, you can make sure that only 4
drops of glue are applied even if the conveyor belt stops with the product in the
window. Controlling the process with the Cycle Limit feature eliminates the
need to write complex logic to detect a stopped conveyor belt.
Figure 15 shows a PWM pulse train configured with a cycle limit of 2. The
PWMCycleLimitDone input tag indicates when the PWM cycle limit has
been reached. The corresponding bit is reset upon the next rising edge of the
output which restarts PWM.
Figure 15 - PWM Cycle Limit

Output Logic
Output State
Only 2 cycles are executed even The cycle limit restarts when the output begins pulsing
though the output logic remains On. on the next rising edge of output logic.

If the output logic turns Off before the cycle limit is reached, you can
configure the pulse cycles to continue until the cycle limit is reached by
enabling the Execute All Cycles option. Figure 16 shows a cycle limit
of 2 with the Execute All Cycles option enabled.
Figure 16 - PWM Cycle Limit with Execute All Cycles Option
Output Logic
Output State
Both cycles are executed even though the output

logic turned Off before the cycle limit was reached.
Minimum On Time, Extend Cycle, and Stagger Output
The Minimum On Time, Extend Cycle, and Stagger Output configuration

options are useful in time-proportional control applications, such as
temperature control. In these applications, PID calculations compare the actual
temperature to the desired setpoint and vary the PWM On time to a heating
element in real time to regulate temperature as it approaches the setpoint, as
shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17 - PWM for Time Proportioned Control
Heated Vessel
Variable PWM On Time

from PID Calculation
Temperature Feedback to Analog Input

In this type of application, the Minimum On Time, Extend Cycle, and Stagger
Output configuration options provide these benefits:
• Minimum On Time and Extend Cycle—Ensures that output devices

that require a minimum time to turn On or that cannot react to a short
pulse cycle can react with any given PWM On time calculation rather
than not turning On.
To ensure the output device turns On when the calculated On time is

less than the minimum On time, you must enable the Extend Cycle
option. When Extend Cycle is enabled, the cycle time is extended
proportionately up to 10 times the calculated On time while taking into
account the minimum On time.
EXAMPLE A solenoid requires at least 40 ms to turn On. During configuration,

you enable the output for PWM, specify a minimum On time of 40
ms, and enable the Extend Cycle option.
If the calculated On time in the PWMOnTime output tag drops below
the 40 ms minimum On time, the module automatically extends the
On time to 40 ms and proportionally extends the cycle time in the
PWMCycleTime output tag.
If the On time drops below 4 ms, the output turns Off because the
cycle cannot extend beyond 10 times the 40 ms On time.
If Extend Cycle is not enabled and the calculated On time is less than the
minimum On time, the output of the module does not energize.
• Stagger Output—Mitigates the power surge from outputs that drive

high power loads by preventing the outputs from turning On
simultaneously. Enabling the Stagger Output option for multiple output
points addresses surges by staggering the leading edge of those outputs
(Figure 18). When the Stagger Output feature is not enabled, output
points turn On immediately at the start of the cycle (Figure 19).
The stagger time for an output is calculated when the output turns On.
If the On time and cycle times are changed by large amounts while the
output is On, the stagger times may begin to overlap.
If the cumulative On time of staggered outputs is less than the cycle,
each new On transition is staggered to begin 50 µs after the prior
staggered output turns Off.

Figure 18 - Outputs with Staggering
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Figure 19 - Outputs without Staggering
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3

PWM Configuration
Follow these steps to configure PWM.
1. Use program logic or the Logix Designer tag editor to define the Cycle
time and On time for an output point via the PWMCycleTime and
PWMOnTime output tags.
For more information about module tags, refer to Appendix B.
2. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Pulse Width
Modulation roll-up category for a high-level view.
3. Click the PointXX category to view a specific point’s configuration.

4. To modify that point’s configuration, or to set its initial configuration,

complete the fields in the PWM area as described in this table.
Field Description 1756-OB16IEF Tag Name 1756-OB16IEFS Tag Name
Enable Pulse Width Modulation Check the checkbox to enable PWM. If this checkbox is cleared, all other C:Pt[x].PWMEnable C:PWM.Enable
(PWM) PWM fields are unavailable, and the PWM On time and cycle time for the
point are ignored.
By default, PWM is disabled.
PWM On Time (view only) Displays the length of time that a pulse is active, as defined in the O:Pt[x].PWMOnTime O:PWM.OnTime
PWMOnTime output tag.
By default, this value is defined in seconds with a range of 0.0002…3600.0.
However, you can define the value as 0…100% of the cycle time by clicking
On Time in Percent.
IMPORTANT: Before PWM functions, you must enable PWM during
configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the
PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags.
If PWM is enabled (C:PWMEnable = 1) and the output is instructed to turn
On (O:Data = 1), the output generates a PWM signal.
PWM Cycle Time (view only) Displays the duration of each pulse cycle, as defined in the PWMCycleTime O:Pt[x].PWM CycleTime O:PWM.CycleTime
output tag. This value is always displayed in seconds with a range of
0.001 …3600.0 seconds.
IMPORTANT: Before PWM functions, you must enable PWM during
configuration and define the PWM cycle time and On time in the
PWMCycleTime and PWMOnTime output tags.
If PWM is enabled (C:PWMEnable = 1) and the output is instructed to turn
On (O:Data = 1), the output generates a PWM signal.
Minimum On Time Type the minimum length of time required for the output to turn On. This C:Pt[x].PWMMinimumOnTime C:PWM.MinimumOnTime
value must be defined in seconds.
For example, if a heating coil requires a minimum of 2 seconds to heat up,
and you enter a value of 2.000 in this field, the shortest pulse allowed is
never less than 2.000 seconds.
The default value of zero disables the feature.
Extend Cycle to Accommodate Check or clear this checkbox to determine the output behavior when the On C:Pt[x].PWMExtendCycle C:PWM.ExtendCycle
Minimum On Time time is less than the minimum On time:
• Check the checkbox to increase the duration of the pulse cycle to
maintain the On time to Cycle time ratio while taking into account the
minimum On time.
Note: Extending the cycle time is typically useful only when the On time
is a result of a calculation.
• Clear the checkbox if you do not want to increase the duration of the
pulse cycle. In this case, the output does not turn On if the On time is less
than the minimum On time.
By default, the checkbox is cleared, and cycles do not extend.
Stagger Output to Adjust Cycle Check the checkbox to minimize the load on the power system by staggering C:Pt[x].PWMStaggerOutput C:PWM.StaggerOutput
Phase to Minimize Simultaneous output transitions. See Figure 18 on page 96.
Outputs By default, this checkbox is cleared and staggering is disabled. When
staggering is disabled for an output point, the output always turns On at the
beginning of a pulse cycle.
On Time in Seconds To define PWM On time in seconds, click On Time in Seconds. C:Pt[x].PWMOnTimeInPercent C:PWM.OnTimeInPercent
or To define PWM On time as a percentage of the cycle time, click On Time in
On Time in Percent Percent.
By default, the On time is defined in seconds.

Field Description 1756-OB16IEF Tag Name 1756-OB16IEFS Tag Name

Enable Cycle Limit Check the checkbox to let only a fixed number of pulse cycles occur. C:Pt[x].PWMCycleLimitEnable C:PWM.CycleLimitEnable
See Figure 15 on page 93.
By default, the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is cleared, and pulse cycles
continue to occur until the output turns Off.
Cycle Limit Enter the maximum number of pulse cycles you want to occur on each C:Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit C:PWM.CycleLimit
output logic transition when Enable Cycle Limit is checked:
• If you check the Execute All Cycles checkbox, the specified number of
cycles occur even if the Data output tag turns Off before the completion of
the specified number of cycles.
• If you clear the Execute All Cycles checkbox, the specified number of
cycles occur only if the Data output tag remains On for a sufficient
amount of time for the specified number of cycles. For example, if you
specify a cycle limit of 4, and the output turns Off after 3 cycles, the 4th
cycle does not occur.
This field is only available when the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is checked.
By default, the cycle limit is 10. Valid values are 1…27.
Execute All Cycles Check the checkbox to always execute the number of cycles specified in the C:Pt[x].PWMExecuteAllCycles C:PWM.ExecuteAllCycles
Cycle Limit field even if the Data output tag turns Off. For example, if you
specify a cycle limit of 2, and the output turns Off after 1 cycle, the second
cycle still occurs despite the output turning Off. See Figure 16 on page 94.
If the output logic transitions multiple times before the cycle limit is reached,
all subsequent transitions are ignored until the cycle limit is reached. Once
the cycle limit is reached, a new cycle sequence begins.
This field is only available when the Enable Cycle Limit checkbox is checked.
By default, the Execute All Cycles checkbox is cleared.
5. To copy the current configuration to one or more of the remaining

output points, so that multiple outputs share the same PWM behavior,
do the following:
a. Select the PointXX category to copy.
b. Click Copy PWM Configuration.
c. On the Copy PWM Configuration dialog box, check the points to
which to apply the current configuration and click OK.
By default, all points are checked.
6. To save the configuration for each output point that you specified,
click OK.

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix fast input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner-
controller or listening controller. All input modules maintain a Module Fault
between Input Modules and word, the highest level of fault reporting. Modules configured to use the Data
Controllers with Event connection format also maintain an Event Fault word to report on
the status of an event connection.
Table 23 lists the fault words and associated tags you can examine in program
logic to indicate when a fault or event has occurred for a fast input module.
Table 23 - Fault Words on Fast Input Modules
Word Input Tag Name Description
Module Fault I:Fault Provides fault summary reporting. Available on all digital input
modules.
Event Fault E:Fault Provides fault summary reporting. Available on all digital input
modules that use the Data with Event or Listen Only with Event
connection format.
module’s density are used. For example, the 1756-IB16IF module has a Module
Fault word of 32 bits.
Table 24 - Bits Set in Module Fault Word
Condition Bits Set

ControlLogix fast digital input modules.
Bit 31 Bit 0
Module Fault Word

All Modules
A communication fault sets all 32 bits in the Module Fault word.

Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix fast digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any
owner-controller or listening controller. Like input modules, output modules
between Output Modules maintain a Module Fault word, the highest level of fault reporting. However,
and Controllers output modules use an additional word to indicate a fault condition.
Table 25 lists the fault word and the associated tag you can examine in program
logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a fast output module.
Table 25 - Fault Words on Fast Output Modules
Word Input Tag Name Description
Module Fault I:Fault Provides fault summary reporting. Available on all digital output
modules.
module’s density are used. For example, the 1756-OB16IEF module has a
Module Fault word of 32 bits. But, because the module is a 16-point module,
only the first 16 bits (0…15) are used in the Module Fault word.
Bits set in the FuseBlown tag are logically entered into the Module Fault word.
Depending on the module type, a bit set in the Module Fault word can mean
multiple things, as indicated in the table.
Table 26 - Bits Set in Module Fault Word
Condition Bit set
Fuse blown Only the bit affected is set to 1.
output modules.
Bit 31 Bit 0
Module Fault Word 1
A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault word. A Fuse Blown
condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault word.
Fuse Blown Tag 1
A blown fuse for any point sets the bit for that point in the FuseBlown tag and
also sets the appropriate bits in the Module Fault word. In the example above,
the bit for the FuseBlown tag is set indicating a blown fuse at point 9.
Bits set for the Fault input tag indicate I/O data may be incorrect due to a fault
due to one of these conditions:
• FuseBlown = 1
• PWMCycleTime outside the valid range of 0.001…3600.0 seconds
• PWMOnTime outside the valid range of 0.0002…3600.0 seconds
or 0…100 percent
• PWMCycleTime ≤ PWMOnTime

Redundant Owners Redundant ownership lets a single controller use redundant adapters to
communicate with a single output or lets two separate controllers coordinate to
control the output.
Configure Redundant Owners
To enable Redundant Ownership mode in the output module, each

connection to the output module is via a redundant owner module definition.
In the module definition, you select between Redundant Output Owner A and
Redundant Output Owner B. Each pair of connections must have an A and a B
requested—that is, if the first is A, the second must be B.
If the second connection does not pair with the original connection, it is
rejected with a general status = 0x01 and extended status = 0x031D. All other
aspects of configuration between the two connections must be identical.
After the connection is established, a redundant owner uses the Claim Owner
Output (COO) tag to indicate that it is ready for ownership of the outputs.
The Ready Owner Output (ROO) tag indicates that an owner is ready to take
ownership if needed. The ROO is implemented as a single bit, OwnerReady, as
this implementation is intended for only two controllers.
When the OwnerClaim bit is set, it indicates that the controller wants to claim
ownership of the redundant connection and have its outputs actively used. If
both redundant owners have COO set, the last originator application that
transitioned its COO flag from cleared to set is the owner.
TIP Only a received 0-to-1 transition, and not simply the receipt of a new
connection, is considered such a transition for ownership.
If neither redundant owner has OwnerClaim set, then the controller that has
the OwnerReady bit set becomes the owner. If neither controller has
OwnerClaim set and both have OwnerReady set, owner A becomes the owner.
If both controllers have OwnerClaim=0 and OwnerReady=0, then the
outputs go to IDLE (Program mode).
Finally, the Input data adds status fields that indicate if the output module has
an active owner (OwnerActive) and for which controller, A or B (OwnerID).
For each of owner A and B, three status fields indicate if the controller is
connected (OwnerAConnected/OwnerBConnected) and echo the output
values received for each owner via OwnerAClaim/OwnerBClaim and
OwnerAReady/OwnerBReady, respectively.

Requirements
You must use output modules that support Redundant Owner connections:
• 1756-OF16IEF output module
Peer Ownership and Scheduled Output are not supported.
• All Allen-Bradley® 1756 input modules that support multiple module

owners
Redundant owner supports these ControlLogix 1756 Ethernet modules:

• 1756-EN2T
• 1756-EN2TR
• 1756-EN2F
About Redundant Owners
Redundant Owner can work in single-controller and multiple-controller

applications, with or without redundancy.
Your application determines which controller is the Claiming Owner and

which is the Ready Owner. The relationship is akin to a primary and secondary
relationship.
Restrictions
The redundant owner solution uses two connections for every I/O module–
one for each of the redundant connections. Each connection is shown in the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer® I/O Configuration–two entries for each I/O
module.
• The two I/O module configurations must match.
• Two connections are used for each I/O module.
• An output module’s ideal RPI is 25 ms.
This speed is for the fastest response to an event. Any output module
RPI can be used, but may have increased response time to a fault.
• An input module’s ideal RPI is 25 ms, though any input module RPI can
be used.
• Direct I/O connections must be used.
• Rack optimized connections are not supported.
Also see Redundant Owner Configuration Tags on page 214.

Single Controller Behavior
A single controller case is the simpler one as both connections are owned by the
same controller. Thus there is never a case where one connection is in Run
mode and the other connection is in Program mode, so no need to worry about
synchronizing.
Figure 20 - Single Controller
Logix5585E DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT DC INTPUT DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT

SAFETY ON
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NET
FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O O
LINK
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K
FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
REM
RUN PROG
DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT DC INTPUT DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT

ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O O
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K
FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
1 1
2 2
32763-M
1. Initialize I/O tags.

2. Set Claim in one connection.
3. Set Ready in the other connection.
4. Monitor which connection is the owner and update tags accordingly
(Non Owner before Owner to make sure that they’re always in sync).

That single controller behavior should result in the following:
1. Output is not owned until the Claim connection is made.

2. Any disruption in the Claim connection causes the I/O module to
switch to the Ready path.
3. When the Claim connection recovers from the disruption, the I/O
module switches back to Claim.
Multiple Controller Behavior
For multiple controllers, the applications synchronize the behavior between

the controllers. Note Ethernet modules A and B, and RedundantOutputA and
RedundantOutputB.
Figure 21 - Multiple Controller
Logix5585E DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT DC INTPUT DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT Logix5585E DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT DC INTPUT DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT
SAFETY ON SAFETY ON
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NET NET
FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O O O O
LINK LINK
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K
FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
REM REM
RUN PROG RUN PROG
1 1
2 2
DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT DC INTPUT DC OUTPUT ANALOG INPUT

ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O O
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K
FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 1
2 2
32762-M
IMPORTANT If you use ControlLogix Redundancy as the multiple controller system, then you
do not have to manage the dual controllers. If you use any other method, then
you must manage the primary and secondary controllers yourself. This
application does not manage the controllers, just the I/O.

You can use Produced/Consumed tags for synchronization; however, the

Redundant Owner Input tags provide the majority of information needed for
synchronization.
• After both controllers decide it is safe, the primary controller sets Claim.
• After the secondary controller sees that the primary controller has taken
ownership, the secondary controller sets Ready.
• The secondary controller monitors the I/O and the other controller to
determine the current owner.
• If the secondary controller becomes the owner, it can set its Claim bit to
take or hold ownership, or can just maintain Ready.
• Once the primary controller comes back and is in Run mode, that
controller toggles its Claim bit, and the I/O switches back to that
controller.
– A “S:FS” XIC should be used to disable Claim/Ready bits until the

controller has entered Run mode and can evaluate if it should make a
Claim or Ready transition.
– Failure to do this could lead to a ‘claim’ happening before the
controller is back in Run mode. Thus, the output would transition
briefly to its Program Mode Safe State prior to entering Run mode
rather than making a smooth transition from secondary controller
back to primary controller.
• When the secondary controller sees that the primary controller has
retaken ownership, it clears its Claim bit and goes back to Ready.
• Monitor for Connection Loss on controller. Add GSV to monitor

connection status and clear Claim and Ready flags on Connection Loss
to prevent undesired behavior when connection is restored.
• Monitor for Major Fault on controller. Optionally, add Fault Routine to

clear Claim and Ready owner flags if Major Fault is not to be cleared in
faulted controller to allow secondary controller to take immediate
control.

Configure the Output Module
In a redundant owner application, configure one output module as Redundant

Owner A and the second as Redundant Owner B. In our example project,
Redundant Owner A is the module connected to Ethernet A, and Redundant
Owner B is the module connected to Ethernet B.
1. In the Module Definition dialog box, in the Connection field, choose

Redundant Owner A.
2. In the Output Data field, choose Redundant Data.
3. To configure the second output module as Redundant Owner B, repeat

steps 1 and 2, choosing Redundant Owner B and Redundant Data.
The module definition is shown in the Module Properties dialog box.

Follow these steps to implement Redundant Ethernet modules in your project.
1. Add the additional I/O configuration to your project for the second
Ethernet module.
In the example project this is EN2T_B.

TIP To simplify testing you may want to create a project just for the
redundant Ethernet modules and test that project before adding in
your application code.
We recommend following the module naming examples used in the

example project.
– Ethernet module in Slot 0: EN2T_A_<your name for the chassis>
– Ethernet module in Slot 1: EN2T_B_<your name for the chassis>
– Reference the example application for more naming examples
2. Add in the task for I/O_Mapping_25ms.
3. Set the periodic rate of this task to 25 ms or a multiple of the fastest
output module RPI.
4. Import the example Program into the I/O_Mapping_25ms task.
5. Modify the imported routines for each chassis that you have in your
system.
In the example project the routines are called R001, R002, and so on.
One chassis per routine.
6. Add an I/O module to the chassis routines.
7. Insert an Add-On Instruction for each digital input module you have in
the chassis.
8. If the digital input module is only 16 channels, set the I16_Ch tag to 1
(true).
This will limit input processing to the first 16 Booleans and reduce
controller scan time.
If you have a digital module that is not compatible with any of the Add-
On Instructions from the example project, you can use the
Redundant_Digital_Input Add-On Instruction to map each channel
individually. You can also create your own Add-On Instruction for the
module.
9. Add the default value for each channel to the Add-On Instruction.
The default value is the value the input will be set to when
communication through both Ethernet modules to the input module is
faulted.
10. Insert a rung with two CPS (Synchronous Copy File) instructions for
each Digital Output module that you have in the chassis.

In the example project, the rung number was equal to the slot number of
the module being referenced. We used rungs with only an NOP (No
Operation) instruction to hold the rung number for slots without an
analog module.
11. In each routine add rungs for the analog modules that you have.
Most analog modules have their own Add-On Instructions.
Be aware of the channel count of the AOI and module.
– If the analog module is in Differential mode, the channel count is cut
in half.
– If you have an analog module that is not compatible with any of the
Add-On Instructions from the example project, you can use the
Redundant_Analog_Input Add-On Instruction to map each channel
individually. You can also create your own Add-On Instruction for
the module.
– In the example project the rung number was equal to the slot number
of the module being referenced. We used rungs with only an NOP
(No Operation) instruction to hold the rung number for slots
without an analog module.
12. Keep the Add-On Instruction at Hold Last State or set Hold Last State
to 0 (zero) to use the default value.
13. Add the default value for each channel to the Add-On Instruction.
The default value is the value the input will be set to when
communication through both Ethernet modules to the input module is
faulted.
Response Times for Output Modules
Response time to a change in ownership is from the time the event takes place
until the time that the output modules uses the connection data from the
redundant connection.
Digital output response to a change in ownership in less than 250 ms. The
average time is 220 ms. A faster RPI does not increase the response time. We
recommend a digital output RPI of 25 ms.
These recommendations are for response performance:

• Faster RPIs have a longer response time.
• Slower RPIs can have a much longer response time.
• RPIs should be 4 x RPI = 200 ms, 8 x RPI = 200 ms, or
16 x RPI = 200 ms, so 25 is the recommended RPI.
• If the prior RPI criterion is not met, the CIP connection timeout delay
minimum will be 200 ms + 1 RPI. If the 4/8/16 x RPI does not equal
200 ms (or 100 ms), then the response will be longer.
• For non-redundant ControlLogix applications, the CIP connection
timeout delay minimum is 100 ms.

• Slower RPIs greatly limit the effect of the response time on the
application.
IMPORTANT This information pertains only to output modules.

Use existing guidelines for setting input module RPIs.
Input Modules
Many ControlLogix® 1756 input modules support multiple owners.
Table 27 lists bulletin number 1756 input modules that do not support
multiple module owners.
IMPORTANT You must use input modules that support multiple owners.
Table 27 - Input modules that do not support multiple owners

Catalog Module Type Replacement Module
Number
1756-IR12 Analog Input, 12-channel RTD Must replace with a 1756-ITR8I and use in 1756-IR6I
compatibility mode. You will lose 6 channels. Your inputs
will be isolated.
1756-IT16 Analog Input, 16-channel non- Replace with1756-IRT8I and use in 1756-IT6I or 1756-IT6I2
isolated thermocouple/mV compatibility mode.
1756-IRT8I Analog Input, 8-channel Must be used in 1756-IR6I or 1756-IT6I compatibility mode.
thermocouple or RTD isolated You will lose 2 channels and all of the new features of the
1756-IRT8I module.
Use the 1756-ITR8I module in remote I/O chassis and 1756-
IR6I or 1756-IT6I module in Logix Designer I/O configuration.
1756-IF8I Analog Input, 8-channel current Must be used in 1756-IF6I compatibility mode. You will lose
or voltage isolated 2 channels and all of the new features of the 1756-IF8I
module.
Use the 1756-IF8I in remote I/O chassis and 1756-IF6I in
Logix Designer I/O Configuration.
1756-IB16ISOE Sequence of Events Digital Input —
1756-IF16IH 16 isolated differential inputs, Use 1756-IF16H.
1 HART modem per channel
1756-IF8IH 8 isolated differential inputs, Use 1756-IF8H.
1 HART modem per channel Both are non-isolated. You can use differential mode input
wiring for isolation.
1756-IF4FXOF2F High-speed input/output —
analog module

Troubleshooting
Issue: I/O Module Connection Error or I/O Module Configuration Error

(yellow triangle in Logix Designer I/O configuration)
1. Verify that both entries in the Logix Designer I/O Configuration have
the same RPI.
2. Verify that both entries in the Logix Designer I/O Configuration have
the same configuration.
You can toggle the Sync_Module_Config BOOL tag in the

IO_Mapping Program MainRoutine Rung 1. This will trigger a copy of
the module A configuration to the module B configuration, making
them the same.
IMPORTANT This copy will not change the module RPI.

The two I/O module entries must have the same configuration.
3. Remove the module from the chassis.

4. Reinsert the module.
5. If you still have the error, delete one of the module entries in the Logix
Designer I/O Configuration and add it into your project again.
These troubleshooting steps below assume that the system was commissioned
and running without any errors before the issue occurred.
Issue: Output is ON in the user application code, but is not ON at the Output
module.
1. Verify that at least one of the connections to the output module is active.
2. Verify that the output is ON in the output module tags.
3. Confirm whether all of the connections in the chassis are faulted,
including the Ethernet modules.
4. Troubleshoot the Ethernet communication issue to the Ethernet
modules.
5. Troubleshoot the error code displayed in Module Properties > Connection
tab.
In the example project, this is EN2T_B.

Issue: Incorrect output behavior on response
1. Verify that only one of the connections to the Output module has the
.OwnerClaim output set to true (1).
2. Verify that only one of the connections to the Output module has the
.OwnerReady output set to true (1).
For all of the issues described in this section, you can consult product manuals,
Rockwell Automation® KnowledgeBase, and Rockwell Automation Technical
Support.

Chapter 6
Install ControlLogix I/O Modules
Topic Page
Install the Module 115
Key the Removable Terminal Block 117
Connect the Wires 118
Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing 122
Choose Extended-depth Housing 123
Install the Removable Terminal Block 125
Remove the Removable Terminal Block 127
Remove the Module from the Chassis 128
Table 28 - Environment and Enclosure

ATTENTION: This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II
applications (as defined in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio
communication services in such environments.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for
those specific environmental conditions that are present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting
from accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the
spread of flame, complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if nonmetallic. The interior
of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional
information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements.
• NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures.

Chapter 6 Install ControlLogix I/O Modules
Table 29 - North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
hazardous locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à une utilisation en
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class I Division 2 environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B, C, D dangereux et non dangereux.
Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only. Each product is Chaque produit est livré avec des marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent
supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location le code de température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs produits
temperature code. When combining products within a system, the most adverse sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le plus défavorable (code de
temperature code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help determine the overall température le plus faible) peut être utilisé pour déterminer le code de température
temperature code of the system. Combinations of equipment in your system are subject global du système. Les combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à
to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de l'installation.
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD WARNING: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION

• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l'environnement est classé
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed non dangereux avant de débrancher l'équipement.
or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que l'environnement est classé
• Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power non dangereux avant de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous
has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous. les connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à l'aide de vis,
Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment loquets coulissants, connecteurs filetés ou autres moyens
by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other fournis avec ce produit.
means provided with this product.
• La substitution de composants peut rendre cet équipement
• Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, inadapté à une utilisation en environnement de Classe I,
Division 2. Division 2.
• If this product contains batteries, they must only be changed in • S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
an area known to be nonhazardous. de changer les piles.
Table 30 - European Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health
and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this
Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2
environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40%
when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment must be used only with ATEX certified Rockwell Automation backplanes.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or
other means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.

Install ControlLogix I/O Modules Chapter 6
Install the Module You can install or remove a ControlLogix® I/O module while chassis power is
applied. Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) provides the flexibility
to maintain modules without having to stop production.
WARNING: When you insert or remove the module while backplane power
is on, an electric arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous
location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.
Repeated electric arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module
and its mating connector. Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that
can affect module operation.
ATTENTION: Although the module is designed to support RIUP, when you

remove or insert a module or an RTB with field-side power applied,
unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur. Exercise
extreme caution when using this feature.
ATTENTION: Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal
damage and affect normal operation. Follow these guidelines when you handle
this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

Follow these steps to insert the module into the chassis.
1. Align the circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides.
Printed Circuit Board
20861-M
2. Slide the module into the chassis until the locking tabs click.
20862-M
Installation of the module is now complete.

Key the Removable Key the removable terminal block (RTB) to prevent inadvertently connecting
the wrong wiring in the RTB to your module. Wedge- and U-shaped bands are
Terminal Block manually inserted into the RTB and module. This process hinders a wired
RTB from being accidentally inserted into a module that does not match the
positioning of the respective tabs.
Key positions on the module that correspond to unkeyed positions on the

RTB. For example, if you place a U-shaped keying band in slot 4 on the
module, do not insert a wedge-shaped tab in slot 4 on the RTB, or your RTB
does not mount on the module. We recommend that you use a unique keying
pattern for each slot in the chassis.
Follow these steps to key the RTB.
1. To key the module, insert the U-shaped band with the longer side near
the terminals.
2. Push the band onto the module until it snaps into place.
20850-M
3. To key the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module

positions, insert the straight, wedge-shaped tab on the RTB with the
rounded edge first.
Module side of RTB
0
12
3
45
67 20851-M

4. Push the tab onto the RTB until it stops.

5. Repeat step 1…step 4 by using additional U-shaped and straight tabs
until the module and RTB lock into each other properly.
Connect the Wires You can use an RTB or a Bulletin 1492 prewired interface module (IFM)(1) to
connect wires to your module. If you are using an RTB, follow the directions to
connect wires to the RTB. IFMs are wired prior to shipping.
WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is

on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous
location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is
nonhazardous before proceeding.
ATTENTION: If multiple power sources are used, do not exceed the specified
isolation voltage.
ATTENTION: When using the 1756-TBCH, do not wire more than two
0.33...1.3 mm2 (22...16 AWG) conductors on any single terminal. Use only
the same size wires with no intermixing of solid and stranded wire types.
When using the 1756-TBS6H, do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single
terminal.
When using the 1756-TBNH, do not wire more than two 0.33...2.1 mm2
(22...14 AWG) conductors on any single terminal. Use only the same size wires
with no intermixing of solid and stranded wire types.
When using the 1756-TBSH, do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single
terminal.
To see a listing of the IFMs available for use with the ControlLogix analog I/O
modules, see Appendix G.
This chapter explains the general guidelines for wiring your digital I/O
modules, including grounding the cable and connecting the wires to each RTB
type.
Table 35 on page 139 shows each module catalog number and the
corresponding page with the wiring diagram.
(1) The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs (1756-TBCH, 1756-TBNH, 1756-TBSH and
1756-TBS6H). Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination
methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency

RTB Types
There are three types of RTBs:

• Cage Clamp—catalog number 1756-TBCH
• NEMA Clamp—catalog number 1756-TBNH
• Spring Clamp—catalog number 1756-TBSH or TBS6H
Each RTP comes with housing. Wire the RTB with a 3.2 mm (1/8 in.)
maximum screwdriver before installing it onto the module.
Cage Clamp
Follow these steps to wire a cage clamp.
1. Strip 9.5 mm (3.8 in.) maximum length of wire.

2. Insert the wire into the open terminal on the side.
3. Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire.
Strain Relief Area

20859-M
The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area. The
wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie.

NEMA Clamp
Follow these steps to wire a NEMA clamp.
1. Strip 8 mm (5/16 in.) maximum length of wire.

2. Turn the terminal screw counterclockwise.
3. Insert the stripped end of the wire under the plate on the terminal.
Strain Relief Area

40201-M
4. Turn the terminal screw clockwise until the wire is secured.
Spring Clamp
Follow these steps to wire a spring clamp.
1. Strip 11 mm (7/16 in.) maximum length of wire.

2. Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB to depress the
spring-loaded clamp.
3. Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the screwdriver.
Strain Relief Area

20860-M

IMPORTANT Make sure the wire, and not the screwdriver, is inserted into the open
terminal to prevent damage to the module.
RTB Wiring Recommendations

Consider these guidelines when wiring your RTB:
• Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up.
• Use a tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB.
• A jumper bar is shipped with certain I/O modules to assist in

installation. For an example of when to use the jumper bar, see the
1756-IA16I wiring diagram.
Extra jumper bars can be purchased by ordering catalog number

1756-JMPR.
• For applications that require heavy gauge wiring, order and use an
extended-depth housing, catalog number 1756-TBE. For more
information, see page 123.

Assemble the Removable Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring connections when
the RTB is seated on the module. Parts of the 1756-TBCH RTB (for example)
Terminal Block and Housing are identified in the table.
2
3
2 5
3
4
20858-M
Item Description
1 Housing cover
2 Groove
3 Side edge of RTB
4 RTB
5 Strain relief area
Follow these steps to attach the RTB to the housing.
1. Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side
edges of the RTB.
2. Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place.
IMPORTANT If additional wire routing space is required for your application, use
extended-depth housing, catalog number 1756-TBE.

Choose Extended-depth There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your
ControlLogix digital I/O module: standard-depth or extended-depth.
Housing
When you order an RTB for your I/O module, you receive standard-depth
housing. If your application uses heavy gauge wiring, you can order extended-
depth housing. Extended-depth housing does not come with an RTB.
Standard-depth Housing Extended-depth Housing
30484-M
IMPORTANT The housings shown are used with a spring clamp RTB, but the capacity for
each remains the same regardless of RTB type.
Cat. No. RTB Type Wire Capacity Number of Wires

1756-TBNH NEMA clamp Standard-depth 36…18 AWG wires
336 mm2 (0.52 in.2) 23…14 AWG wires
1756-TBSH Spring clamp (20-position)
1756-TBCH Cage clamp
1756-TBS6H Spring clamp (36-position)
1756-TBE Any RTB that uses heavy gauge Extended-depth 40…18 AWG wires
wiring 628 mm2 (0.97 in.2)

Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended-depth Housing
When you use extended-depth housing, catalog number 1756-TBE, the I/O
module depth is increased. The diagram shows the difference in depth between
an I/O module using standard-depth housing and one using extended-depth
housing.
Dimensions are in mm (in.)
144.73 (5.698)
12.7 (0.5)
131.75 (5.187)
3.18 (0.125)
Rear Surface of
ControlLogix Chassis
Standard-depth Housing
Extended-depth Housing
41682
IMPORTANT The depth from the front of the module to the back of the chassis is as
follows:
• Standard-depth housing = 147.91 mm (5.823 in.)
• Extended-depth housing = 157.43 mm (6.198 in.)

Install the Removable This section shows how to install the RTB onto the module to connect the
wiring.
Terminal Block
WARNING: When you connect or disconnect the removable terminal block
(RTB) with field-side power applied, an electrical arc can occur. This could
cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.
SHOCK HAZARD: If the RTB is installed onto the module while the field-side
power is applied, the RTB is electrically live. Do not touch the RTB’s terminals.
Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury.
The RTB is designed to support removal and insertion under power (RIUP).
However, when you remove or insert an RTB with field-side power applied,
extreme caution when using this feature. It is recommended that field-side
power be removed before installing the RTB onto the module.
Before installing the RTB, make certain of the following:

• Field-side wiring of the RTB has been completed
• RTB housing is snapped into place on the RTB
• RTB housing door is closed
• The locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked
To install the RTB, follow these steps.
1. Align the top, bottom and left side guides of the RTB with the guides on
the module.
Top Guide
Bottom Guide
20853-M

2. Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until the latches
snap into place.
3. Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module.
20854-M

Remove the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis, you must first remove the
RTB from the module.
Terminal Block
SHOCK HAZARD: If the RTB is removed from the module while the field-side
power is applied, the module is electrically live. Do not touch the RTB’s
terminals. Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury.
The RTB is designed to support removal and insertion under power (RIUP).
However, when you remove or insert an RTB with field-side power applied,
extreme caution when using this feature. It is recommended that field-side
power be removed before removing the module.
Follow these steps to remove an RTB from the module.
1. Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module.

2. Open the RTB door by using the bottom tab.
3. Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the module.
SHOCK HAZARD: Do not wrap your fingers around the entire door.
20855-M

Remove the Module Follow these steps to remove a module from its chassis.
from the Chassis 1. Push in the top and bottom locking tabs.
20856-M
2. Pull module out of the chassis.
20857-M

Chapter 7
Configure ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules
Topic Page
Configuration Process Overview 130
Create a New Module 131
Edit the Configuration 136
Connection Properties 137
View and Change Module Tags 138
You must configure your module upon installation. The module does not work
until it has been configured. In most cases, you will use the Studio 5000 Logix
Designer® application to complete the configuration. The application uses
default configurations, such as RPI and filter times, to get your I/O module to
communicate with its owner-controller. You can edit the default configuration
as needed from the Module Properties dialog box.

Chapter 7 Configure ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules
Configuration Follow these steps to configure a ControlLogix® digital I/O module with Logix
Designer.
Process Overview
1. Create a new module.
2. Accept or customize the default configuration for the module.
3. Edit the configuration as changes are needed.
Figure 22 - Full Configuration Profile Diagram
New Module
1. Choose a module
from the list.
2. Choose a Major
Revision.
Naming Screen
Name
Slot number
Communication/
Click a tab/category to connection format Click OK to use the default
customize the configuration. Minor revision configuration.
Keying choice
Tab/Category OK Button
Series of
Application
Specific
Screens
Configuration Complete
Edit Configuration
A series of tabs in the programming

software enable you to change a module’s
configuration.
41058

Configure ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules Chapter 7
Create a New Module Before creating a new module, make sure you complete these procedures in the
Logix Designer application:
• Create a controller project.
• If you plan to add the I/O module to a remote chassis, add ControlNet
or EtherNet/IP communication modules to both the local and remote
chassis in the I/O Configuration tree.
– For more information on ControlLogix ControlNet modules, see

ControlNet Modules in Logix5000™ Control Systems, publication
CNET-UM001.
– For more information on ControlLogix EtherNet/IP modules, see
EtherNet/IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual,
publication ENET-UM001.
IMPORTANT The Studio 5000® environment lets you add I/O modules online. When using
a previous version, you must be offline to create a new module.
Follow these steps to add a local or remote I/O module.
1. To add an I/O module to a local chassis, right-click the I/O

Configuration folder and choose New Module.
or
To add an I/O module to a remote chassis, right-click the remote
communication module, and choose New Module.
2. On the Select Module Type dialog box, select the digital module to
create, and then click Create.

3. On the Select Major Revision dialog box, click OK to accept the default
major revision.
4. On the New Module dialog box, complete the fields and click OK.
• For information about how to choose an electronic keying method,
see page 40.
• For information about how to choose a communication format or
connection type, see page 136.
The fields on the New Module dialog box vary depending on the catalog number of your I/O module.
To edit the module’s configuration, make sure the

Open Module Properties checkbox is checked.
Click Change to open the Module Definition dialog box

and choose additional properties, such as an electronic
keying method and connection format.

Module Definitions, Communication or Connection Formats
The initial configuration of a module requires you to choose a module

definition or a communication or connection format. The term that is used
depends on the Add-on Profile (AOP) for your module. Earlier AOPs use
communication formats, later AOPs use connection formats, and the newest
AOPs use module definitions.
A module definition or communication or connection format determines the

following:
• Available configuration options
• Type of data that is transferred between the module and its owner-
controller
• Which tags are generated when the configuration is complete
IMPORTANT Communication formats cannot be changed whether online or offline after a

program is downloaded to the controller.
However, connection formats can be changed when offline after a program
is downloaded to the controller.
The communication or connection format also defines the connection

between the controller writing the configuration and the module. The number
and type of choices varies depending on what module you are using and
whether it is in a local or remote chassis.
TIP When you choose a Listen-only format, only the General and Connection
tabs appear when you view a module’s properties in Logix Designer.
Controllers that want to listen to a module but not own it use a Listen-only
format.

Tables 31 and 32 describe the communication and connection formats

available for input modules.
Table 31 - Input Module Communication Formats
Communication Format Data Return Module
Input Data Module returns only general fault and input data. 1756-IA16, 1756-IA16I, 1756-IA32,
1756-IB16I, 1756-IB16, 1756-IB32,
CST Timestamped Input Data Module returns input data with the value of the system clock from its 1756-IC16, 1756-IG16, 1756-IH16I, 1756-IM16I,
local chassis when the input data changes. 1756-IN16, 1756-IV16, 1756-IV32
Rack Optimization The 1756-CNB module collects all digital input words in the remote
chassis and sends them to the controller as a single rack image. This
connection type limits the status and diagnostic information
available.
Listen Only—Input Data These formats have the same definition as the similarly-named
options above except that they are Listen-only connections.
Listen Only—CST Timestamped Input Data
Listen Only—Rack Optimization
Full Diagnostic Input Data Module returns input data, the value of the system clock from its 1756-IA8D, 1756-IB16D
local chassis when the input data changes, and diagnostic data.
Listen Only—Full Diagnostic Input Data This format has the same definition as Full diagnostic input data 1756-IA8D, 1756-IB16D
except that it is a Listen-only connection.
Table 32 - Input Module Module Definitions

Connection Input Data Data Return Module
Data Timestamp Data Module returns input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync system 1756-IB16IF
time. To configure per point timestamping, see page 83.
Data Module returns input data without COS timestamps. This format is
useful when the highest possible throughput is required.
Data with Event Timestamp Data Results in two input connections:
• Connection to return input data with COS timestamps in CIP Sync
system time.
• Connection to initiate event tasks. See page 89.
Listen Only Timestamp Data These formats have the same definition as those above except that
Data
Listen Only with Event Timestamp Data

Tables 33 and 34 describe the communication and connection formats

available for output modules.
Table 33 - Output Module Communication Formats
Communication Format Data Return Module
Output Data The owner-controller sends the module only output data. 1756-OA8, 1756-OA16I, 1756-OB8, 1756-OB8I,
1756-OB16I, 1756-OB16IS(1),
Scheduled Output Data The owner-controller sends the module output data and a CST 1756-OB32, 1756-OC8, 1756-OG16,
timestamp value 1756-OH8I, 1756-ON8, 1756-OW16I,
1756-OX8I
Rack Optimization The owner-controller sends all digital output words to the remote
chassis as a single rack image.
Listen Only—Output Data These formats have the same definition as those above except that
Listen Only—Rack Optimization
CST Timestamped Fuse Data—Output Data The owner-controller sends the module only output data. The 1756-OA16, 1756-OA8E, 1756-OB16E,
module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock 1756-OB8EI, 1756-OV16E, 1756-OV32E
(from its local chassis) when the fuse is either blown or reset.
CST Timestamped Fuse Data—Scheduled Output Data The owner-controller sends the module output data and a CST
timestamp value. The module returns fuse blown status with the
value of the system clock (from its local chassis) when the fuse is
either blown or reset.
Listen Only - CST Timestamped Fuse Data—Output Data This choice has the same definition as CST timestamped fuse data -
output data except that it is a Listen-only connection.
Full Diagnostics—Output Data The owner-controller sends the module only output data. The 1756-OA8D, 1756-OB16D
module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics.
Full Diagnostics—Scheduled Output Data The owner-controller sends the module output data and a CST
timestamp value. The module returns diagnostic data and a
timestamp of diagnostics.
Listen Only—Full Diagnostics—Output Data This format has the same definition as Full diagnostics - output data
except that it is a Listen-only connection.
Scheduled Output Data per Point The owner-controller sends the module output data and a CST 1756-OB16IS only
timestamp value.
(1) The 1756-OB16IS module does not support the Rack optimization, Listen only—rack optimization and Scheduled output data communication formats.
Table 34 - Output Module Module Definitions

Connection Output Data Data Return Module
Data Data The owner-controller sends the module only output data. 1756-OB16IEF, 1756-OB16IEFS
Scheduled Per Module The owner-controller sends the module output data and a CIP Sync 1756-OB16IEF
timestamp value.
Scheduled Per Point The owner-controller sends output data and a CIP Sync timestamp 1756-OB16IEFS
value to points configured for scheduling.
Listen Only None Establishes a Listen-only connection with no data. 1756-OB16IEF, 1756-OB16IEFS
Peer Input with Data Data with Peer Establishes a Listen-only connection to input peer modules. 1756-OB16IEF
See the Peer Ownership Application Technique,
publication 1756-AT016.

Edit the Configuration After you add a module to the I/O configuration in Logix Designer, you can
review and edit the configuration. You can also download the data to the
controller while online. This is called dynamic reconfiguration.
Follow these steps to edit a module’s configuration.
1. On the Controller Organizer, right-click an I/O module and choose

Properties.
2. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the tab/category

corresponding to the feature to modify, and then click OK:
• To configure connection properties between the module and the
controller, see page 137.
• To configure features common to all modules, see Chapter 3.
• To configure features specific to diagnostic modules, see Chapter 4.
• To configure features specific to fast modules, see Chapter 5.

Connection Properties Connection properties define controller-to-module behavior. When defining

connection properties, you can do the following:
• Select a requested packet interval (RPI) to set a defined, maximum
period of time when data is transferred to the owner-controller
• Choose to inhibit the module
• Configure the controller so that a loss of connection to this module
causes a major fault
• View information about the condition of the connection between the
module and the controller
Follow these steps to configure connection properties.
1. On the Module Properties dialog box, click the Connection

tab/category.
2. Complete the fields as described and click OK.

Field Description
Requested Packet Interval (RPI) Enter an RPI value or use the default.
See RPI in Chapter 2 for more information.
Inhibit module Check the box to prevent communication between the owner-controller and
the module. This option enables maintenance of the module without faults
being reported to the controller.
See Module Inhibiting in Chapter 3 for more information.
Major fault On Controller If Check the box to create a major fault if there is a connection failure with the
Connection Fails While in Run Mode module while in Run mode.
For important information on this checkbox, see the Logix5000 Controllers
Information and Status Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM015.
Module Fault The fault box is empty if you are offline. The type of connection fault appears
in the text box if a fault occurs when the module is online.

View and Change When you create a module, a set of tags is created by the ControlLogix system
that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of Logix Designer. Each configured
Module Tags feature on your module has a unique tag that can be used in the controller’s
program logic.
Follow these steps to access a module’s tags.
1. On the Controller Organizer, expand the Controller folder, right-click

Controller Tags, and choose Monitor Tags.
The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data.

2. Expand the slot number of the module for which to view information.
See Appendix B for details on viewing and changing a module’s
configuration tags.

Chapter 8
Wiring Diagrams
This chapter provides wiring diagrams for all ControlLogix® digital modules.
Table 35 - Wiring Diagrams by Catalog Number
Cat. No. Page Cat. No. Page
1756-IA8D 141 1756-OA16I 159
1756-IA16 141 1756-OB8 160
1756-IA16I 142 1756-OB8EI 161
1756-IA32 143 1756-OB8I 162
1756-IB16 144 1756-OB16D 163
1756-IB16D 145 1756-OB16E 164
1756-IB16I 146 1756-OB16I 167
1756-IB16IF 147 1756-OB16IEF 168
1756-IB32 148 1756-OB16IEFS 169
1756-IC16 149 1756-OB16IS 170
1756-IG16 150 1756-OB32 171
1756-IH16I 151 1756-OC8 172
1756-IM16I 152 1756-OG16 173
1756-IN16 152 1756-OH81 174
1756-IV16 153 1756-ON8 175
1756-IV32 154 1756-OV16E 176
1756-OA8 155 1756-OV32E 177
1756-OA8D 156 1756-OW16I 178
1756-OA8E 157 1756-OX8I 178
1756-OA16 158
Table 36 - Types of Digital I/O Modules

Digital I/O Type Description
Diagnostic These modules provide diagnostic features to the point level. These modules
have a D at the end of the catalog number.
Electronic fusing These modules have internal electronic fusing to prevent too much current from
flowing through the module. These modules have an E at the end of the catalog
number.
Individually isolated These modules have individually isolated inputs or outputs. These modules have
an I at the end of the catalog number.
Fast These modules provide fast response times. These modules have an F at the end
of the catalog number.

Chapter 8 Wiring Diagrams
The 1756 digital I/O modules support these features.

Table 37 - 1756 I/O Module Features
Module Type Features
1756 digital AC input modules • Change of state: Software configurable
• Timestamp of inputs: ±200 μs
• Module keying: Electronic, software configurable
• RTB keying: User-defined mechanical
1756 digital AC output modules • Scheduled outputs: Synchronization within 16.7 seconds maximum, reference to the Coordinated System Time
• Fault states per point: Hold last state, on or off (off is default)
• States in Program mode per point: Hold last state, on or off (off is default)
• Fusing:
– 1756-OA8D, 1756-OA8E: Electronically fused per point
– 1756-OA16: Mechanically fused/group, 3.15 A @ 250V AC slow blow, 1500 A interruption current, Littelfuse p/n
H2153.15
– All other modules: Not protected. A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs (see publication 1492-TD008)
1756 digital DC input modules • Reverse polarity protection: All modules except 1756-IG16 module
• Change of state: Software configurable
• Timestamp of inputs:
– ±100 μs for sequence of events modules(1)
– ±200 μs for all other modules
• RTB Keying: User-defined mechanical
1756 digital DC output modules • Scheduled outputs: Synchronization within 16.7 seconds maximum, reference to the Coordinated System Time
• Fault states per point: Hold last state, on or off (off is default)
• States in Program mode per point: Hold last state, on or off (off is default)
• Fusing:
– 1756-OB8EI, 1756-OB16D, 1756-OB16E, 1756-OB16IEF, 1756-OB16IEFS, 1756-OV16E, 1756-OV32E:
Electronically fused per point
– All other modules not protected. A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs. See publication 1492-TD008.
1756 digital contact modules • Scheduled outputs: Synchronization within 16.7 seconds maximum, reference to the Coordinated System Time
• Configurable fault states per point: Hold last state, on or off (off is default)
• Configurable states in Program mode per point: Hold last state, on or off (off is default)
• Fusing: Not protected. A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs (See publication 1492-TD008)
(1) For details, see the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module Installation Instructions, publication 1756-IN592, and the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module User Manual,
publication 1756-UM528.
IMPORTANT For the latest I/O module specifications, see the 1756 ControlLogix I/O
Modules Technical Specifications, publication 1756-TD002.

Wiring Diagrams Chapter 8
1756-IA8D
ControlLogix AC (79...132V) diagnostic input module

Simplified Schematic
+5V 1756-IA8D
2 1
Not Used L1-0 Loss of Field Power
Input 4 3
Daisy Chain to
Display Other RTBs L2-0 IN-0
6 5
GND L2-0 IN-1
+5V ControlLogix Backplane 8 7
Interface Group 0 L2-0 IN-2 Group 47 kΩ, 1/2 W
10 9 0 5% Resistor
Open Wire L2-0 IN-3
Display 12 11
L2-1 IN-4
GND ControlLogix Backplane 14 13
L2-1 IN-5 47 kΩ, 1/2 W,
Interface
16 15 Group 5% Resistor
Group 1 L2-1 IN-6 1
18 17
L2-1 IN-7
20 19
L2-1 L1-1 Loss of Field Power
L2
L1
1756-IA16
ControlLogix AC (74...132V) input module
1756-IA16
2 1
IN-1 IN-0
IN-O +5V Group 0 4 3
IN-3 IN-2
Daisy
L2-0 Chain to
6 5
IN-5 IN-4 Group 0

Other
8 7
GND RTBs
IN-7 IN-6
10 9
ControlLogix Display L2-0 L2-0
Backplane 12 11
Interface IN-9 IN-8
14 13
IN-11 IN-10
16 15
Group 1 IN-13 IN-12 Group 1

18 17
IN-15 IN-14
20 19
L2-1 L2-1
L2 L1

1756-IA16I
ControlLogix AC (79...132V) isolated input module
1756-IA16I
Isolated
Wiring
IN-O +5V L2-0 L2-0 2 1 IN-0 L1-0
L2-1 4 3 IN-1
L2-0 L2-2 L2-2 6 5 IN-2 L1-2
L2-3 8 7 IN-3
L2-4 L2-4 10 9 IN-4 L1-4
GND 12 11
L2-5 IN-5
L2-6 14 13 IN-6
ControlLogix Display L2-7 16 15 IN-7
Backplane Jumper Bar
L2-8 18 17 IN-8
Interface (Cut to Length)
L2-9 20 19 IN-9
L2-10 22 21 IN-10
L2-11 24 23 IN-11
Nonisolated L2-12 26 25 IN-12
Wiring
Additional jumper bars can be purchased by L2-13 28 27 IN-13
using catalog number 1756-JMPR. L2-14 30 29 IN-14
L2-15 32 31 IN-15
L2 L2-15 34 33 Not Used
Not used 36 35 Not Used
L1
Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs

1756-IA32

+5V 1756-IA32
IN-O
L2-0 IN-1 2 1 IN-0

IN-3 4 3 IN-2
GND Group 0 IN-5 6 5 IN-4 Group 0
IN-7 8 7 IN-6
ControlLogix Display Daisy Chain IN-9 10 9 IN-8
Backplane to Other RTBs IN-11 12 11 IN-10
Interface IN-13 14 13 IN-12
IN-15 16 15 IN-14
L2-0 18 17 L2-0
IN-17 20 19 IN-16
IN-19 22 21 IN-18
IN-21 24 23 IN-20
Group 1 Group 1
IN-23 26 25 IN-22
IN-25 28 27 IN-24
IN-27 30 29 IN-26 L1
IN-29 32 31 IN-28
IN-31 34 33 IN-30
L2-1 36 35 L2-1
L2

1756-IB16
ControlLogix DC (10...31.2V) input module
+5V 1756-IB16
IN-0 ? 
IN-1 IN-0
? ?
GND-0 Group 0
IN-3 IN-2
Daisy Chain ? ?
GND to Other IN-5 IN-4 Group 0
RTBs ? ?
ControlLogix Display IN-6
IN-7
Backplane  ?
Interface GND-0
GND-0
? 
IN-9 IN-8
? ?
IN-11 IN-10
? ?
Group 1 IN-12 Group 1
IN-13
? ?
IN-15 IN14
? ?
GND-1 GND-1
- +
DC COM

1756-IB16D
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) diagnostic input module
Input +5V ControlLogix

IN-0 Backplane Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756-IB16D
Interface Display GND-0 2 1 IN-0
GND-0 4 3 IN-1
Group 0 GND-0 IN-2 Group 0
6 5 Leakage Resistor
GND-0 8 7 IN-3
GND-0 GND-1 10 9 IN-4
GND-1 12 11 IN-5
Group 1 Group 1
GND-1 14 13 IN-6
GND GND-1 16 15 IN-7
GND-2 18 17 IN-8
Open Wire GND-2 20 19 IN-9
Group 2 Group 2
GND-2 22 21 IN-10 Leakage Resistor
GND-2 24 23 IN-11
GND-3 26 25 IN-12
GND-3 28 27 IN-13
Group 3 GND-3 30 29 IN-14 Group 3
GND-3 32 31 IN-15
GND-3 34 33 Not Used
Not Used 36 35 Not Used
– +
DC COM
Recommended Leakage Resistor Size 1/4 W, 5% Supply Voltage

3.9K 10V DC
5.6K 12V DC
15K 24V DC
20K 30V DC

1756-IB16I
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) isolated input module
+5V 1756-IB16I
IN-0
Isolated DC-0 (-) GND-0 2 1 IN-0 DC-0 (+)
Wiring DC-1 (-) GND-1 IN-1 DC-1 (+)
4 3
GND-0 GND-2 6 5 IN-2
GND-3 8 7 IN-3
GND Source Input Wiring
GND-4 10 9 IN-4
DC-5 (-) – +
GND-5 12 1 1 IN-5 (+) DC-5 (+)
ControlLogix Display DC-6 (-)
– +
GND-6 14 1 3 IN-6 (+) DC-6 (+)
Backplane GND-7 16 1 5 IN-7
Jumper Bar (Cut to Length) GND-8 IN-8
Interface 18 1 7
GND-9 20 1 9 IN-9
GND-10 22 2 1 IN-10
GND-11 24 2 3 IN-11
Nonisolated GND-12 26 2 5 IN-12 Sink Input
Wiring
Additional jumper bars can be purchased by Wiring GND-13 28 2 7 IN-13
using catalog number 1756-JMPR. GND-14 30 2 9 IN-14
GND-15 32 3 1 IN-15
DC (-) GND-15 34 3 3 Not Used DC (+)
Not Used 36 3 5 Not Used
Daisy Chain to Other RTBs

1756-IB16IF
ControlLogix DC (10…30V) sinking or sourcing, isolated, fast input module
1756-IB16IF
Isolated Wiring
GND-0 2 1 IN-0
DC-1 (-) GND-1 4 3 IN-1 DC-1 (+)
DC-2 (-) GND-2 6 5 IN-2 DC-2 (+)
GND-3 8 7 IN-3
GND-4 10 9 IN-4
Module Source Input Wiring DC-5 (-) GND-5 12 11 IN-5 (+) DC-5 (+)
DC-6 (-) GND-6 14 13 IN-6 (+) DC-6 (+)
GND-7 16 15 IN-7
Jumper Bar Cut to Length GND-8 18 17 IN-8
GND-9
Module Sink Input Wiring
20 19 IN-9
GND-10 22 21 IN-10
Nonisolated Wiring
GND-11 24 23 IN-11
GND-12 26 25 IN-12
Additional jumper bars can be purchased by GND-13 28 27 IN-13
using catalog number 1756-JMPR. GND-14 30 29 IN-14
GND-15 32 31 IN-15
DC (-) GND-15 34 33 Not Used DC (+)
Current Limiter
Opto-isolator Display
IN-x
ControlLogix Backplane Interface
GND-x

1756-IB32
ControlLogix DC (10...31.2V) input module

+5V
Current Limiter 1756-IB32
IN-0
IN-1 2 1 IN-0
GND-0 IN-3 4 3 IN-2
IN-5 6 5 IN-4
GND Group 0 IN-7 8 7 IN-6 Group 0
IN-9 10 9 IN-8
Daisy Chain IN-10
ControlLogix Display to Other RTBs
IN-11 12 11
Backplane IN-13 14 13 IN-12

Interface IN-15 16 15 IN-14
GND-0 18 17 GND-0
IN-17 20 19 IN-16
IN-19 22 21 IN-18
IN-21 24 23 IN-20
IN-23 26 25 IN-22
Group 1 Group 1
IN-25 28 27 IN-24
IN-27 30 29 IN-26
IN-29 32 31 IN-28
IN-31 34 33 IN-30
GND-1 36 35 GND-1
DC COM – +

1756-IC16
ControlLogix DC (30...60V) input module
Simplified Schematic 1756-IC16
+5V 2 1
IN-0 IN-1 IN-0
4 3
GND-0 IN-3 IN-2

6 5
IN-5 IN-4
GND Group 0 Group 0
8 7
IN-7 IN-6
ControlLogix Display 10 9
Backplane GND-0 GND-0

Interface 12 11
IN-9 IN-8
14 13
IN-11 IN-10
16 15
18 17
IN-15 IN-14
20 19
GND-1 GND-1
Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs – +
DC COM

1756-IG16
ControlLogix TTL input module

Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring
1756-IG16 1756-IG16
– DC
2 1 I/O Wire
2 1 IN-1 IN-0
4 3
IN-1 IN-0
4 3 IN-3 IN-2
5V DC IN-3 IN-2 6 5
6 5 IN-5 IN-4 +
8 7 I/O Wire
IN-5 IN-4
8 7 + IN-7 IN-6
IN-7 IN-6 DC Power Wire 10 9
–
10 9 – DC-0(+) DC COM 0
+ DC DC-0(+) DC COM 0 12 11
12 11 IN-9 IN-8 TTL Input
14 13 Device
IN-9 IN-8
14 13 IN-11 IN-10 Capacitor
16 15
IN-11 IN-10 5V DC Power 0.01 μF Typical
16 15 IN-13 IN-12
(See notes below.)
IN-13 IN-12 18 17
18 17 IN-15 IN-14
IN-15 IN-14 20 19
20 19 DC-1(+) DC COM 1
DC-1(+) DC COM 1
+5 DC
1.5 K
1K 74HCT14
560
IN
1.5 K
1K 74HCT14
560
IN
DC COM

1756-IH16I
ControlLogix DC (90...146V) isolated input module
1756-IH16I
+5V
IN-0 DC-0 (-) GND-0 2 1 IN-0 DC-0 (+)
Isolated GND-1 4 3 IN-1
Wiring GND-2 6 5 IN-2
GND-0
DC-3 (-) GND-3 8 7 IN-3 DC-3 (+)
GND-4 10 9 IN-4
GND GND-5 12 11 IN-5
GND-6 14 13 IN-6
ControlLogix Display DC-7 (-) GND-7 16 15 IN-7 D C-7 (+ )
Jumper Bar GND-8 18 17 IN-8
Backplane
(Cut to Length) GND-9 20 19 IN-9
Interface
GND-10 22 21 IN-10
GND-11 24 23 IN-11
Nonisolated
Wiring GND-12 26 25 IN-12
Additional jumper bars can be purchased GND-13 28 27 IN-13
by using catalog number 1756-JMPR. GND-14 30 29 IN-14
GND-15 32 31 IN-15
DC (-)
GND-15 34 33 Not Used
Not Used 36 35 Not Ysed DC (+)

1756-IM16I
1756-IM16I
+5V Isolated Wiring
IN-O
L2-0 L2-0 2 1 IN-0 L1-0
L2-1 IN-1
L2-0 4 3
L2-2 L2-2 6 5 IN-2 L1-2
L2-3 8 7 IN-3
GND L2-4 L2-4 10 9 IN-4 L1-4
L2-5 12 11 IN-5
ControlLogix Display L2-6 14 13 IN-6
Backplane Jumper Bar L2-7 16 15 IN-7
Interface (Cut to Length) L2-8 18 17 IN-8
L2-9 20 19 IN-9
L2-10 22 21 IN-10
L2-11 24 23 IN-11
Nonisolated L2-12 26 25 IN-12
Additional jumper bars can be purchased by Wiring
L2-13 28 27 IN-13
using catalog number 1756-JMPR. L2-14 30 29 IN-14
L2-15 32 31 IN-15
L2 L2-15 34 33 Not Used
L1
1756-IN16
1756-IN16
IN-O +5V
2 1
IN-1 IN-0
L2-0
4 3
L1
IN-3 IN-2
GND
6 5
IN-5 IN-4
L2 Group 0 8
Group 0
7
ControlLogix Display IN-7 IN-6
Backplane 10 9
Interface L2-0 L2-0
12 11
IN-9 IN-8
14 13
IN-11 IN-10
Group 1 16 15 Group 1
IN-13 IN-12
18 17
IN-15 IN-14
20 19
L2-1 L2-1
Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs

1756-IV16
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) sourcing input module
Simplified Schematic 1756-IV16
+5V 2 1
DC-0+ IN-1 IN-0

4 3
IN-3 IN-2
IN-0
Group 0 6 5 Group 0
IN-5 IN-4
GND 8 7
IN-7 IN-6
ControlLogix Display 10 9
Backplane DC-0 + DC-0 +
Interface 12 11
IN-9 IN-8
14 13
IN-11 IN-10
16 15
18 17
IN-15 IN-14
20 19
DC-1 + DC-1 +
+ – DC COM

1756-IV32
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) sourcing input module

1756-IV32
+5V
DC-0+ IN-1 2 1 IN-0
IN-3 4 3 IN-2
IN-5 6 5 IN-4
Group 0 IN-7 8 7 IN-6 Group 0
IN-0 IN-9 10 9 IN-8
GND
IN-11 12 11 IN-10
Daisy IN-13 14 13 IN-12
ControlLogix Display Chain to
Other IN-15 16 15 IN-14
Backplane
RTBs DC-0 (+) 18 17 DC-0 (+)
Interface
IN-17 20 19 IN-16
IN-19 IN-18
22 21
Jumper IN-21 24 23 IN-20
Wire IN-23 26 25 IN-22
IN-25 28 27 IN-24
Group 1 IN-27 30 29 IN-26 Group 1

IN-29 32 31 IN-28
IN-31 34 33 IN-30
DC-1 (+) 36 35 DC-1 (+)
+ –
DC COM

1756-OA8
ControlLogix AC (74...265V) output module
Simplified Schematic 1756-OA8

+5V L1-0
2 1
L1-0 OUT-0
4 3
L1-0 OUT-1
6 5
OUT-0 Group 0 L1-0 OUT-2 Group 0
8 7
ControlLogix Backplane Interface OUT-3
L1-0
Display 10 9
L1-0 Not used

12 11
Surge Current Chart
L1-1 OUT-4
14 13
20 A Surge
L1-1 OUT-5
16 15
Group 1 OUT-6 Group 1
L1-1
Current
18 17
L1-1 OUT-7
20 19
2A L1-1 Not Used
L2
0 43 ms
Time
Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs
L1

1756-OA8D
ControlLogix AC (74...132V) diagnostic output module
Simplified Schematic 1756-OA8D
Diagnostic Control Block with Opto 2 1

ControlLogix and Transformer Isolation L1 Not Used L2-0
Backplane 4 3
VAC
Interface L1-0 OUT-0
Short GATE 6 5
Group 0 Group 0
Verify/ L1-0 OUT-1
No Load OUT 8 7
L1-0 OUT-2
L2
10 9
Display Loss of Field Power L1-0 OUT-3
12 11
Daisy L1-1 OUT-4

Surge Current Chart Chain to 14 13
Other L1-1 OUT-5
RTBs
Surge @ 30 °C (86 °F) 16 15
8A L1-1 OUT-6
Surge @ 60 °C (140 °F) L1-1 OUT-7
Current
5A
20 19
Continuous @ 30 °C (86 °F)
1A L1-1 L2-1
500 mA
L2
0 43 ms
Time Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs
L1

1756-OA8E
ControlLogix AC (74...132V) electronically-fused output module

Simplified Schematic 1756-OA8E
2 1
ControlLogix Opto and Transformer Isolation
L1 Not Used L2-0
Backplane 4 3
VAC
Interface L1-0 OUT-0
Short GATE
6 5
L1-0 OUT-1
OUT Group 0 Group 0
8 7
L2 L1-0 OUT-2
10 9
Display Loss of Field Power
L1-0 OUT-3
12 11
Surge Current Chart Daisy L1-1 OUT-4

Chain to 14 13
Other
L1-1 OUT-5
20 A Surge RTBs
16 15
L1-1 OUT-6
18 17
Current
Group 1 L1-1 OUT-7 Group 1

20 19
L1-1 L2-1
2A
L2
Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs
0 43 ms
Time L1

1756-OA16
Simplified Schematic 1756-OA16

L1-0
ControlLogix 2 1
Backplane OUT-1 OUT-0
+5V
Interface 4 3
Group 0
OUT-3 OUT-2
6 5
Daisy Chain OUT-5 OUT-4 Group 0
L2-0
(Fused per Group) to Other 8 7
Display RTBs OUT-7 OUT-6

10 9
L1-0 L2-0
12 11
OUT-0 OUT-9 OUT-8
14 13
OUT-11 OUT-10
16 15
Group 1 OUT-13 OUT-12

Group 1
Surge Current Chart 18 17
OUT-15 L1
OUT-14
20 19
Surge Per Group L1-1 L2-1
20 A
Current
Per Group
5A
2A
500 mA L1 L2
0 43 ms
Time

1756-OA16I
ControlLogix AC (74...265V) isolated output module

1756-OA16I
Isolated Wiring
+5V L1-0
L1-0 L1-0 1 2 OUT-0 L2-0
L1-1 3 4 OUT-1
L1-2 L1-2 5 6 OUT-2 L2-2
L1-3 7 8 OUT-3
L1-4 L1-4 10 9 OUT-4 L2-4
OUT-0 L1-5 12 11 OUT-5
L1-6 14 13 OUT-6
L1-7 16 15 OUT-7
Display L1-8 18 17 OUT-8
Jumper Bar (Cut to Length)
L1-9 20 19 OUT-9
Surge Current Chart
L1-10 22 21 OUT-10
L1-11 24 23 OUT-11
Nonisolated
L1-12 26 25 OUT-12
20 A Wiring
L1-13 28 27 OUT-13
L1-14 30 29 OUT-14
Current
L1-15 32 31 OUT-15
L1 L1-15 34 33 Not Used
Continuous @ 30 °C (86 °F) Not Used 36 35 Not Used
2A L2
1A
0 43 ms
Time
Additional jumper bars can be purchased
Daisy Chain to Other RTBs by using catalog number 1756-JMPR.

1756-OB8
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) output module
Simplified Schematic 1756-OB8

DC-0(+) Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs
+5V 2 1
DC-0 (+) OUT-0
OUT-0
4 3
Group 0 DC-0 (+) OUT-1 Group 0
6 5
DC-0 (+) OUT-2
RTN 8 7
OUT-0 DC-0 (+) OUT-3
Display 10 9
RTN OUT-0 RTN OUT-0
DC-1 (+) OUT-4

Surge 14 13
4A DC-1 (+) OUT-5
Continuous @ 60 °C (140 °F) DC-1 (+) OUT-6
Current
2A 18 17
DC-1 (+) OUT-7
20 19
RTN OUT-1 RTN OUT-1
0 10 ms
Time Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs
+ –
DC COM

1756-OB8EI
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) electronically-fused, isolated output module

1756-OB8EI
+5V
DC-0(+) +
DC-0 (+) 1 2 OUT-0
Isolated - RTN OUT-0 3 4 OUT-0
Wiring
DC-1 (+) 5 6 OUT-1
RTN OUT-1 7 8 OUT-1
OUT-0 +
DC-2 (+) 10 9 OUT-2
- RTN OUT-2 12 11 OUT-2
14 13
OUT-0 DC-3 (+) OUT-3
RTN OUT-3 16 15 OUT-3
Display RTN DC-4 (+) 18 17 OUT-4
Output
OUT-0 Nonisolated
ControlLogix Backplane Interface Device Wiring
DC-5 (+) 22 21 OUT-5
DC-6 (+) 26 25 OUT-6
Surge Current Chart Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs
DC-7 (+) 30 29 OUT-7
Surge RTN OUT-7 32 31 OUT-7
4A
Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs Not Used 36 35 Not Used
Current
2A
+ –
0 10 ms
Time DC COM

1756-OB8I
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) isolated output module

Simplified Schematic 1756-OBI
+5V
DC-0(+)
DC-0 (+) 2 1 OUT-0
Isolated RTN OUT-0 4 3 OUT-0
OUT-0 Wiring DC-1 (+) 6 5 OUT-1
RTN OUT-1 8 7 OUT-1
DC-2 (+) 10 9 OUT-2
OUT-0 RTN OUT-2 12 11 OUT-2
DC-3 (+) 14 13 OUT-3
Display RTN RTN OUT-3 16 15 OUT-3
Output DC-4 (+) 18 17 OUT-4
ControlLogix Backplane Interface Device OUT-0 RTN OUT-4 20 19 OUT-4
DC-5 (+) 22 21 OUT-5
Daisy
DC-6 (+) 26 25 OUT-6
Surge Current Chart Chain to
Other RTN OUT-6 28 27 OUT-6
RTBs
Nonisolated DC-7 (+) 30 29 OUT-7
Surge Wiring RTN OUT-7 32 31 OUT-7
4A
Daisy Not Used 34 33 Not Used
Chain to Not Used 36 35 Not Used
Other
RTBs
Current
2A
0 10 ms
Time

1756-OB16D
ControlLogix DC (19.2...30V) diagnostic output module

Simplified schematic Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756-OB16D
+ DC
Short Circuit
Detect +DC-0 2 1 OUT-0
+5V +5V
+5V +DC-0 4 3 OUT-1
Optoisolation
+DC-0 6 5 OUT-2
+DC-0 8 7 OUT-3
+DC-0 10 9 OUT-4
Group 0 Group 0
+DC-0 12 11 OUT-5
OUT +DC-0 14 13 OUT-6
ControlLogix GND-0 16 15 OUT-7
Backplane RTN +DC-1 18 17 OUT-8
Interface Display Output Verify/No Load
+DC-1 20 19 OUT-9
+DC-1 22 21 OUT-10
Surge Current Chart +DC-1 24 23 OUT-11
+DC-1 26 25 OUT-12
Surge
4A Group 1 +DC-1 28 27 OUT-13 Group 1
+DC-1 30 29 OUT-14
GND-1 32 31 OUT-15
Current
2A GND-1 34 33 Not Used

Daisy Chain
to Other RTBs
0 10 ms
Time + – DC COM

1756-OB16E
ControlLogix DC (10...31.2V) electronically-fused output module

1756-OB16E
Display Optoisolation DC-0(+) 2 1
OUT-1 OUT-0
4 3
Group 0 OUT-3 OUT-2 Group 0

6 5
OUT-5 OUT-4
Daisy Chain to
OUT-0 8 7
Other RTBs
OUT-7 OUT-6
ControlLogix Electronic Fuse RTN 10 9
Backplane Circuitry OUT-0 DC-0(+) RTN OUT-0

12 11
Interface
OUT-9 OUT-8
14 13
OUT-11 OUT-10
16 15
OUT-13 OUT-12
OUT-15 OUT-14
20 19
DC-1(+) RTN OUT-1
+ –
DC COM
Surge Current Charts, Typical
Note: At currents greater than 4 Amps, the trip time can be as fast as 20uS.
Figure 23 - Current vs. Time to Trip When Using a 10V DC Power Supply


Figure 27 - Current vs. Time to Trip When Using a 31.2V DC Power Supply

1756-OB16I
Simplified Schematic 1756-OB16I

Isolated Sourcing
Isolated Wiring Output Wiring
DC-0(+) DC-0 (+) DC-0 (+) 2 1 OUT-0 DC-0 (-)
DC-1 (+) 4 3 OUT-1
+5V DC-2 (+) DC-2 (+) 6 5 OUT-2 DC-2 (-)
DC-3 (+) 8 7 OUT-3
DC-4 (+) 10 9 OUT-4
Sinking Output Wiring DC-5 (+) 12 11 OUT-5
OUT-0 DC-6 (+) DC-6 (+) 14 OUT-6 DC-6 (-)
13
+ –
ControlLogix Backplane Interface DC-7 (+) 16 15 OUT-7
Jumper Bar DC-8 (+) 18 17 OUT-8
Display (Cut to Length) DC-9 (+) 20 19 OUT-9
DC-10 (+) 22 21 OUT-10
DC-11 (+) 24 23 OUT-11
Surge Current Chart Nonisolated Nonisolated
Wiring DC-12 (+) 26 25 OUT-12 Sourcing
DC-13 (+) 28 OUT-13 Output
4A Surge 27
Wiring
DC-14 (+) 30 29 OUT-14
DC-15 (+) 32 31 OUT-15
DC(+) DC-15 (+) 34 33 Not Used
Current
Not Used 36 Not Used

2A 35
DC(-)
1A
by using catalog number 1756-JMPR.
0 10 ms
Time

1756-OB16IEF
ControlLogix DC (10…30V) electronically-protected, sinking or sourcing,

isolated, fast output module
Simplified Schematic 1756-OB16IEF Isolated Sourcing

DC-0(+) DC-0 (+) DC-0 (+) 2 1 OUT-0 DC-0 (-)
DC-1 (+) 4 3 OUT-1
Isolator
DC-2 (+) DC-2 (+) 6 5 OUT-2 DC-2 (-)
DC-3 (+) 8 7 OUT-3
DC-4 (+) 10 9 OUT-4
OUT-0 Sinking Output Wiring DC-5 (+) 12 11 OUT-5
DC-6 (+) DC-6 (+) 14 13 OUT-6 DC-6 (-)
Fault + –
Display ControlLogix DC-7 (+) 16 15 OUT-7
Backplane Jumper Bar DC-8 (+) 18 17 OUT-8
Interface (Cut to Length) DC-9 (+) OUT-9
20 19
DC-10 (+) 22 21 OUT-10
DC-11 (+) 24 23 OUT-11
Surge DC-13 (+) 28 27 OUT-13 Output
4A DC-14 (+) 30 OUT-14 Wiring
29
DC-15 (+) 32 31 OUT-15
DC(+) DC-15 (+) 34 Not Used
Continuous 2 A @ 45 °C (113°F) 33
Current
2A Not Used 36 35 Not Used

DC(-)
Continuous 1 A @ 60 °C (140 °F)
1A
Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Additional jumper bars can be purchased
0 10 ms by using catalog number 1756-JMPR.
Time

1756-OB16IEFS
ControlLogix DC (10…30V) scheduled, electronically-protected, sinking or

sourcing, isolated, fast output module
1756-OB16IEFS Isolated Sourcing
DC-0(+) DC-0 (+) DC-0 (+) 2 1 OUT-0 DC-0 (-)
DC-1 (+) 4 3 OUT-1
Isolator
DC-2 (+) DC-2 (+) 6 5 OUT-2 DC-2 (-)
DC-3 (+) 8 7 OUT-3
DC-4 (+) 10 9 OUT-4
OUT-0 Sinking Output Wiring DC-5 (+) 12 11 OUT-5
DC-6 (+) DC-6 (+) 14 13 OUT-6 DC-6 (-)
Fault + –
Display ControlLogix DC-7 (+) 16 15 OUT-7
Backplane Jumper Bar DC-8 (+) 18 17 OUT-8
Interface (Cut to Length) DC-9 (+) OUT-9
20 19
DC-10 (+) 22 21 OUT-10
DC-11 (+) 24 23 OUT-11
Surge DC-13 (+) 28 27 OUT-13 Output
4A DC-14 (+) 30 OUT-14 Wiring
29
DC-15 (+) 32 31 OUT-15
DC(+) DC-15 (+) 34 Not Used
Continuous 2 A @ 45 °C (113 °F) 33
Current
2A Not Used 36 35 Not Used

DC(-)
Continuous 1 A @ 60 °C (140 °F)
1A
Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Additional jumper bars can be purchased
0 10 ms by using catalog number 1756-JMPR.
Time

1756-OB16IS
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) scheduled, isolated output module

Simplified Schematic 1756-OB16IS
Isolated Sourcing
Isolated Wiring
Output Wiring
DC-0(+) DC-0 (+) OUT-0 DC-0 (-)
DC-0 (+) 2 1
DC-1 (+) 4 3 OUT-1
+5V DC-2 (+) DC-2 (+) 6 5 OUT-2 DC-2 (-)
DC-3 (+) 8 7 OUT-3
DC-4 (+) 10 9 OUT-4
Sinking Output Wiring DC-5 (+) 12 11 OUT-5
OUT-0 DC-6 (+) DC-6 (+) OUT-6
+ –
14 13 DC-6 (-)
ControlLogix Backplane Interface DC-7 (+) 16 15 OUT-7
Jumper Bar DC-8 (+) 18 17 OUT-8
Display (Cut to Length) DC-9 (+) 20 19 OUT-9 Nonisolated
DC-10 (+) 22 21 OUT-10 Sourcing
DC-11 (+) 24 23 OUT-11 Output
Nonisolated
Surge Current Chart DC-12 (+) 26 25 OUT-12 Wiring
Wiring
DC-13 (+) 28 27 OUT-13
Surge
4A DC-14 (+) 30 29 OUT-14
DC-15 (+) 32 31 OUT-15
DC(+) DC-15 (+) 34 33 Not Used
Continuous @ 30 °C (86 °F) Not Used Not Used
Current
36 35
2A DC(-)
by using catalog number 1756-JMPR.
0 10 ms
Time

1756-OB32
ControlLogix DC (10...31.2V) output module

1756-OB32
DC-0(+)
OUT-1 2 1 OUT-0
+5V Group 0 OUT-3 4 3 OUT-2
OUT-0
OUT-5 6 5 OUT-4
OUT-7 8 7 OUT-6
RTN OUT-0 Daisy Chain
OUT-9 10 9 OUT-8
to Other
OUT-11 12 11 OUT-10 Group 0
RTBs
ControlLogix Backplane Interface OUT-13 14 13 OUT-12
OUT-15 16 15 OUT-14
Display
DC-0(+) 18 17 RTN OUT-0
OUT-17 20 19 OUT-16
OUT-19 22 21 OUT-18
Surge Current Chart OUT-21 24 23 OUT-20
OUT-23 26 25 OUT-22
Group 1 OUT-25 28 27 OUT-24 Group 1
Surge
1A OUT-27 30 29 OUT-26
Continuous @ 60 °C (140 °F) OUT-29 OUT-28
Current
32 31
0.5 A OUT-31 34 33 OUT-30
DC-1(+) 36 35 RTN OUT-1
0 10 ms _
+
Time
DC COM

1756-OC8
ControlLogix DC (30...60V) output module
Simplified Schematic Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756-OC8

DC-0(+)
2 1
+5V DC-0 (+) OUT-0

OUT-0 4 3
DC-0 (+) OUT-1
Group 0 6 5 Group 0
RTN OUT-0 DC-0 (+) OUT-2
8 7
DC-0 (+) OUT-3
10 9
Display RTN OUT-0 RTN OUT-0
12 11
DC-1(+) OUT-4
14 13
Surge Current Chart
DC-1(+) OUT-5
Surge DC-1(+) OUT-6
4A
18 17
DC-1(+) OUT-7
Continuous @ 60 °C (140 °F) 20
Current
19
2A RTN OUT-1 RTN OUT-1
Daisy Chain to
Other RTBs
+ –
0 10 ms
DC COM
Time

1756-OG16
ControlLogix TTL output module

Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring
1756-OG16
1756-OG16
– DC DC Power Wire
+
5V DC 2 1
2 1
Power –
OUT-1 OUT-0 OUT-1 OUT-0
4 3 4 3

+5 V DC 6 5 6 5
8 7 8 7
10 9 + I/O Wire 10 9
+ DC DC-0(+) DC COM 0 DC-0(+) DC COM 0
12 11
12 11
OUT-9 OUT-8 –
14 13 TTL OUT-9 OUT-8
14 13
OUT-11 OUT-10 Output
16 15 Device OUT-11 OUT-10
16 15
OUT-13 OUT-12 Capacitor
18 17 0.01 μ F Typical OUT-13 OUT-12
OUT-15 OUT-14 (See notes below.) 18 17
20 19 OUT-15 OUT-14
DC-1(+) DC COM 1 20 19
DC-1(+) DC COM 1
+5 DC
74AC14
OUT
74AC14
OUT
DC COM

1756-OH8I

1756-OH8I
Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring
DC-0
+5V
+
OUT-0 DC-0 (+) 2 1 OUT-0
- RTN OUT-0 4 3 OUT-0
RTN DC-1 (+) 6 5 OUT-1
OUT-0 RTN OUT-1 8 7 OUT-1
+
DC-2 (+) 10 9 OUT-2
ControlLogix Backplane Interface - RTN OUT-2 12 11 OUT-2
DC-3 (+) 14 13 OUT-3
Display
Non-Isolated
Surge Current Chart Wiring DC-4 (+) 18 17 OUT-4
Surge DC-5 (+) 22 21 OUT-5
4A
Daisy RTN OUT-5 24 23 OUT-5
chain to DC-6 (+) 26 25 OUT-6
other
Current
RTBs RTN OUT-6 28 27 OUT-6

2A DC-7 (+) 30 29 OUT-7
Not used 34 33 Not used
Daisy
chain to Not used 36 35 Not used
other
0 10 ms RTBs
Time
+ – DC COM

1756-ON8

1756-ON8
Simplified Schematic Daisy Chain to Other RTBs
+5V L1-0 2 1
L1-0 OUT-0
4 3
L1-0 OUT-1
6 5
OUT-0 Group 0 L1-0 OUT-2 Group 0

8 7
ControlLogix Backplane Interface L1-0 OUT-3
Display 10 9
L1-0 Not Used

L1-1 OUT-4
20 A Surge 14 13
L1-1 OUT-5
16 15
Group 1 Group 1
Current
L1-1 OUT-6
18 17
L1-1 OUT-7
2A 20 19
L1-1 Not Used L2
0 43 ms
Time
L1

1756-OV16E
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) electronically-fused, sinking output module
1756-OV16E
Display Optoisolation
DC-0(+)
2 1
OUT-1 OUT-0
4 3
OUT-0
OUT-3 OUT-2
6 5
Group 0 OUT-5 OUT-4 Group 0
RTN 8 7
OUT-0 OUT-7 OUT-6

Electronic Fuse 10 9
ControlLogix
Circuitry DC-0(+) RTN OUT-0
Backplane
12 11
Interface
OUT-9 OUT-8
14 13
OUT-11 OUT-10
OUT-13 OUT-12
Group 1 Group 1
18 17
2A Surge OUT-15 OUT-14

20 19
Continuous @ 60 °C (140 °C) DC-1(+) RTN OUT-1

Current
1A
0 10 ms + –
Time
DC COM
Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Daisy Chain to Other RTBs

1756-OV32E
ControlLogix DC (10...30V) electronically-fused, sinking output module

Daisy Chain to 1756-OV32E Daisy Chain to
Display Optoisolation Other RTBs Other RTBs
DC-0(+)
OUT-1 2 1 OUT-0
OUT-3 4 3 OUT-2
OUT-0 OUT-5 6 5 OUT-4
OUT-7 8 7 OUT-6
OUT-9 10 9 OUT-8
Group 0 Group 0
RTN OUT-0 OUT-11 12 11 OUT-10
OUT-13 14 13 OUT-12
ControlLogix Electronic Fuse OUT-14
OUT-15 16 15
Backplane Circuitry
DC-0(+) 18 17 RTN OUT-0
Interface
OUT-17 20 19 OUT-16
OUT-19 22 21 OUT-18
OUT-21 24 23 OUT-20
Surge Current Chart OUT-23 26 25 OUT-22
Group 1 OUT-25 28 27 OUT-24 Group 1
OUT-27 30 29 OUT-26
2A Surge 32 31 OUT-28
OUT-29
Continuous @ 60 °C (140 °F) OUT-31 34 33 OUT-30
Current
1A DC-1(+) 36 35 RTN OUT-1
+ _
0 10 ms
Time
DC COM

1756-OW16I
ControlLogix AC (10...240V) DC (5...125V) isolated contact module
1756-OW16I
+24V Isolated Wiring
L1-0 L1-0 2 1 OUT-0 L2-0
Display L1
L1-1 4 3 OUT-1 N.O.
L1-2 L1-2 6 5 OUT-2 N.O. L2-2
L1-3 8 7 OUT-3 N.O.
OUT DC-4 (+) DC-4 (-)
ControlLogix L1-4 10 9 OUT-4 N.O.
Backplane L1-5 12 11 OUT-5 N.O.
Interface L1-6 14 13 OUT-6 N.O.
Jumper Bar L1-7 16 15 OUT-7 N.O.
(Cut to Length) L1-8 18 17 OUT-8 N.O.
L1-9 20 19 OUT-9 N.O.
L1-10 22 21 OUT-10 N.O.
L1-11 24 23 OUT-11 N.O.
Nonisolated L1-12 26 25 OUT-12 N.O.
Wiring L1-13 28 27 OUT-13 N.O.
Additional jumper bars can be purchased L1-14 30 29 OUT-14 N.O.
by using catalog number 1756-JMPR. L1-15 32 31 OUT-15 N.O
L1 L1-15 34 33 Not Used
L2
Daisy Chain
to Other RTBs
1756-OX8I
ControlLogix AC (10...240V) DC (5...125V) isolated contact module
Simplified Schematic 1756-OX8I
+24V Isolated Wiring L1-0 2 1 OUT-0 N.C.

L1-0 L2-0
L1-0 L1-0 4 3 OUT-0 N.O.
L1-1 6 5 OUT-1 N.C.
ControlLogix
L1-1 8 7 OUT-1 N.O.
Backplane DC-2 (+) L1-2 10 9 OUT-2 N.C.
Interface OUT-0 N.C. DC-2 (-)
L1-2 12 11 OUT-2 N.O.
L1-3 14 13 OUT-3 N.C.
Jumper Bar (Cut to Length) L1-3 OUT-3 N.O.
16 15
OUT-0 N.O. (Part number 97739201) L1-4 OUT-4 N.C.
Display 18 17
L1-4 20 19 OUT-4 N.O.
L1-5 22 21 OUT-5 N.C.
L1-5 24 23 OUT-5 N.O.
Nonisolated L1-6 26 25 OUT-6 N.C.
Wiring L1-6 28 27 OUT-6 N.O.
Additional jumper bars can be purchased by L1-7 30 29 OUT-7 N.C.
using catalog number 1756-JMPR. L1-7 32 31 OUT-7 N.O
L1 L1-7 34 33 Not Used
L2

Appendix A
Troubleshoot Your Module
Topic Page
Status Indicators for Input Modules 179
Status Indicators for Output Modules 180
Use the Logix Designer Application for Troubleshooting 182
This appendix describes the status indicators on the ControlLogix® digital

modules and how to use them to troubleshoot the module. Each I/O module
has status indicators on the front of the module.
Status Indicators ControlLogix input modules support the status indicators that are described in
Table 38. The available status indicators vary by module catalog number, as
for Input Modules shown in Figure 28 on page 180.
Table 38 - Status Indicators for Input Modules

Indicator Status Description
OK Status Steady green The inputs are being multicast and in a normal operating state.
Flashing green The module has passed internal diagnostics, but is not
multicasting inputs or is inhibited.
Uninhibit the connection or establish a connection to enable
communication to the module.
Steady red The module must be replaced.
Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out.
Check the controller and chassis communication.
I/O Status Yellow The input is On.
Fault Status Red The input has encountered a fault.
Check the input point at the controller.

Appendix A Troubleshoot Your Module
Figure 28 - Input Module Status Indicators by Catalog Number
1756-IB16, 1756-IB16I,
1756-IC16, 1756-IG16,
1756-IA8D, 1756-IA16 1756-IH16I, 1756-IV16 1756-IB16IF
AC INPUT DC INPUT DC INPUT

I/O Status
Indicator
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O OK Status ST 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 O ST 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 O
Fault FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
K Indicator ST
K K
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Status Indicator
DIAGNOSTIC PEER DEVICE
1756-IA8D, 1756-IA16I,
1756-IB16D 1756-IA32, 1756-IV32 1756-IM16I, 1756-IN16
DC INPUT DC INPUT AC INPUT

ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 01 2 3 4 5 6 7
FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O ST 8 9
1 1 1 1 1 1 O O
0 1 2 3 4 5
K K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
ST 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
DIAGNOSTIC ST 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
20945
Status Indicators ControlLogix output modules support the status indicators that are described
in Table 39. The available status indicators vary by module catalog number, as
for Output Modules shown in Figure 29 on page 181.
Table 39 - Status Indicators for Output Modules
Indicator Status Description
OK Status Steady green The outputs are actively being controlled by a system processor.
Flashing green The module has passed internal diagnostics but is not actively controlled
or it is inhibited or controller is in Program mode.
Uninhibit connection, establish connection or transition controller to
Run mode to enable communication to module.
Steady red The module must be replaced.
Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out.
Check the controller and chassis communication.
I/O Status Yellow The output is On.
Fuse Status Red A short overload fault has occurred for a point in this group.
Check the wiring for a short-overload. Also check the Module Properties
dialog box in the Logix Designer application and reset the fuse.
Fault Status Red The output has encountered a fault.
Check the output point at the controller.
Diagnostic Status Steady red The output has encountered a fault.
Check the output point at the controller.
Flashing red The output is listening for peer inputs and using the inputs to determine
the state of the output point.

Troubleshoot Your Module Appendix A
Figure 29 - Output Module Status Indicators by Catalog Number
1756-OA16 1756-OA16I 1756-OA8, 1756-ON8
AC OUTPUT AC OUTPUT AC OUTPUT
I/O Status Indicator ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

O OK Status ST 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 O O
ST 01 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fuse Status Indicator FUSE • K Indicator ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K K
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
FUSE •
1756-OA8D 1756-OA8E 1756-OB16D
AC OUTPUT AC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O O O
FUSE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K
Fault Status Indicator FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K K
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DIAGNOSTIC ELECTRONICALLY FUSED DIAGNOSTIC

1756-OB16I, 1756-OB16IEF
1756-OB16E, 1756-OV16E 1756-OB16IS, 1756-OG16
DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT
Diagnostic ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Status DIAG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O
FUSE • O
K ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
O
K Indicator ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
K
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DIAG 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
FUSE •
ELECTRONICALLY FUSED PEER DEVICE
1756-OB16IEFS 1756-OB8I, 1756-OB8I,

1756-OB32, 1756-OV32E 1756-OC8, 1756-OH8I
DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT DC OUTPUT

ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FLT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 O ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O
ST 8 9
K 0 1 23 4 5 K
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 K
FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ST 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
ST 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
ST 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
SCHEDULED ST 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
1756-OB8EI 1756-OW16I 1756-OX8I
DC OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT
ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O ST 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O
FUSE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K K K
ST 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ELECTRONICALLY FUSED

Use the Logix Designer In addition to the status indicator display on the module, the Logix Designer
application alerts you to fault conditions.
Application for
Troubleshooting Fault conditions are reported in these ways:
• Warning signal on the main screen next to the module—This occurs

when the connection to the module is broken.
• Message in a screen’s status line.
• Notification in the Tag Editor—General module faults are also reported

in the Tag Editor. Diagnostic faults are reported only in the Tag Editor.
• Status on the Module Info tab.
Figures 30 and 31 display fault notification in the Logix Designer application.
As shown in Figure 30, a warning icon appears in the I/O Configuration

tree when a communication fault occurs.
Figure 30 - Warning Signal on Main Screen

Troubleshoot Your Module Appendix A
As shown in Figure 31, major and minor faults are listed on the Module Info
tab in the Status section.
Figure 31 - Fault Message in Status Line
As shown in Figure 32, the Value field displays 65535 to indicate the module
connection has been broken.
Figure 32 - Notification in Tag Editor
Fault Type Determination

When you are monitoring a module’s configuration properties in the Logix
Designer application and receive a Communication fault message, the
Connection tab lists the type of fault under Module Fault.

Notes:

Appendix B
Tag Definitions
Topic Page
Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags 185
Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags 188
Fast Input Module Tags 191
Fast Output Module Tags 196
Redundant Owner Configuration Tags 214
Array Data Structures 215
This appendix describes the tags that are used for standard, diagnostic, and fast
input and output modules.
Module-defined data types and tags are created when a module is initiated.
The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module and
the communication or connection format chosen during configuration.
Standard and Diagnostic ControlLogix® standard and diagnostic input modules have two types of tags:
Input Module Tags • Configuration—Structure of data sent from the controller to the I/O
module upon powerup.
• Input—Structure of data continually sent from the I/O module to the

controller containing the current operational status of the module.
IMPORTANT Tables 40 through 43 list all possible standard and diagnostic input module
tags. In each application, the series of tags varies, depending on how the
module is configured.

Appendix B Tag Definitions
Table 40 - Standard Input Module Configuration Tags

Name Data Type Definition
COSOnOffEn DINT Change of State On to Off—Causes updated data to be sent to the controller immediately after an input for an On to Off
(1bit per point) transition of the masked input points. The CST timestamp also is updated. May be used to trigger an event task in the
controller.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
COSOffOnEn DINT Change of State Off to On—Causes updated data to be sent to the controller immediately after an input for an Off to On
(1 bit per point) transition of the masked input points. The CST timestamp also is updated. May be used to trigger an event task in the
controller.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
FilterOnOff_0_7… SINT Filter Times On to Off—Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition. Operates on groups
(1 byte per group) of eight points.
Valid DC filter times = 0, 1, 2, 9, 18 ms
Valid AC filter times = 1, 2 ms
FilterOffOn_0_7… SINT Filter Times Off to On—Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition. Operates on groups
(1 byte per group) of eight points.
Valid DC filter times = 0, 1, 2 ms
Valid AC filter times = 1, 2 ms
Table 41 - Standard Input Module Data Tags

CSTTimestamp DINT[2] Coordinated System Time Timestamp—Timestamp can be configured to indicate the time that data changed (see
(8 bytes) COSOffOnEn, COSOnOffEn, COSStatus, DiagCOSDisable) and/or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred (see OpenWireEn,
Field PwrLossEn).
Data DINT Off/On—Status for each input point.
(1 bit per point) 0 = Off
1 = On
Fault DINT Fault Status—An an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and input data for that point may be
(1 bit per point) incorrect. Check other diagnostic faults, if they are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication to
the input module is lost, then all points for the module are faulted.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault (OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault)
Table 42 - Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags

COSOnOffEn DINT Change of State On to Off—Triggers an event in the controller for On to Off transition of input point and causes the
(1bit per point) input module to update the data table as soon as possible. The CST timestamp is also updated.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
COS OffOnEn DINT Change of State Off to On—Triggers an event in the controller for Off to On transition of input point and causes the
(1 bit per point) input module to update the data table as soon as possible. The CST timestamp is also updated.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
DiagCOSDisable BOOL Diagnostic Change of State—Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic status data with an updated timestamp as
(1 bit per point) soon as the diagnostic data changes state.
FaultLatchEn DINT Latch Fault—If enabled for a point, any OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state even if the fault no
(1 bit per point) longer exists until you clear the fault.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable latching
FieldPwrLossEn DINT Field Power Loss—Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic.
(1 bit per point) 0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Tag Definitions Appendix B
Table 42 - Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags (continued)

FilterOnOff_0_7… SINT Filter Time On to Off—Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition. Operates on groups of
(1 byte per group) eight points.
Valid DC filter times = 0, 1, 2, 9, 18 ms.
Valid AC filter times = 1, 2 ms.
FilterOffOn_0_7… SINT Filter Time Off to On—Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition. Operates on groups of
(1 byte per group) eight points.
Valid DC filter times = 0, 1, 2 ms.
Valid AC filter times = 1, 2 ms.
OpenWireEn DINT Open Wire—Enables Open Wire diagnostic.
(1 bit per point) 0 = Disable.
1 = Enable.
Table 43 - Diagnostic Input Module Data Tags

CSTTimestamp DINT[2] Coordinated System Time Timestamp—Timestamp can be configured to indicate the time that data changed (see
(8 bytes) COSOffOnEn, COSOnOffEn, COSStatus, DiagCOSDisable) and/or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred (see OpenWireEn,
Field PwrLossEn).
Data DINT Input Status—On/Off status for each input point.
1 = On
Fault DINT Fault Status—An ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and input data for that point may be incorrect.
(1 bit per point) Check other diagnostic faults, if they are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication to the input
module is lost or inhibited, then all points for the module are faulted by the processor.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault (OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault)
FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss—AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is disconnected from the module. Open
(1 bit per point) Wire also is detected.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault
OpenWire DINT Open Wire—Diagnostic that detects that a wire has been disconnected from the input point. If a group of points shows
(1 bit per point) this fault, then possible the return (L1 or GND) is missing from the module. Also see FieldPwrLoss.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault

Standard and Diagnostic ControlLogix standard and diagnostic digital output modules have three types
of tags:
Output Module Tags
• Configuration—Structure of data sent from the controller to the I/O

controller containing the current operational status of the module.
• Output—Structure of data continually sent from the controller to the

I/O module that can modify the module behavior.
IMPORTANT Tables 44 through 49 list all possible standard or diagnostic output module
tags. In each application, the series of tags varies, depending on how the
module is configured.
Table 44 - Standard Output Module Configuration Tags

FaultMode DINT Fault Mode—Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs.
(1bit per point) See FaultValue.
0 = Use FaultValue (Off or On)
1 = Hold Last State
FaultValue DINT Fault Value—Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs.
(1 bit per point) See FaultMode.
0 = Off
1 = On
ProgMode DINT Program Mode—Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program
(1 bit per point) mode. See ProgValue.
0 = Use ProgValue (Off or On)
1 = Hold Last State
ProgValue DINT Program Value—Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program
(1 bit per point) mode. See ProgMode.
0 = Off
1 = On
ProgToFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Transition—Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communication failure
(1 byte per module) occurs in Program mode. Otherwise outputs remain in Program mode. See ProgMode, ProgValue, FaultMode, FaultValue.
0 = Outputs stay in Program mode if a communication failure occurs.
1 = Outputs go to FaultMode if a communication failure occurs.

Table 45 - Standard Output Module Input Data Tags

CSTTimestamp DINT[2] Coordinated System Time Timestamp—Timestamp of diagnostic input data including fusing (see BlownFuse,
(8 bytes) NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault, FieldPwrLoss), which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away.
Data DINT Data—Off/On status for the output point echoed back from the output module. This is used to verify proper
(1 bit per point) communication only. No field side verification is done. For field side verification, see OutputVerifyFault.
0 = Off
1 = On
Fault DINT Fault—This is an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and I/O data for that point may be incorrect.
(1 bit per point) Check other diagnostic faults, if they are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication to the input
module is lost, then all points for the module are faulted.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault (FuseBlown, NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault, FieldPwrLoss, or CommFault)
FuseBlown DINT Fuse Is Blown—An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or overload condition for an output point. All
(1 bit per point) FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault
Table 46 - Standard Output Module Output Data Tags

CSTTimestamp DINT[2] Coordinated System Time Timestamp—Timestamp to be used with scheduled outputs and coordinated system time
(8 bytes) (CST). Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time (CST timestamp) at which the output module
is to apply its outputs.
Data DINT Output Status—On/Off status of the output point originating from the controller.
1 = On
Table 47 - Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags

FaultLatchEn DINT Latch Fault—If enabled for a point, any NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault or FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state
(1bit per point) even if the fault no longer exists until the user clears the fault. This does not affect FuseBlown; it is always latched.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable latching
FaultMode DINT Fault Mode—Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs.
(1bit per point) See FaultValue.
0 = Use FaultValue (Off or On)
1 = Hold Last State
FaultValue DINT Fault Value—Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communication fault occurs.
(1 bit per point) See FaultMode.
0 = Off
1 = On
FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss—Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic.
1 = Enable
NoLoadEn DINT No Load—Enables No Load diagnostic.
1 = Enable
OutputVerifyEn DINT Output Verify—Enables Output Verify diagnostic.
1 = Enable

Table 47 - Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags (continued)

ProgMode DINT Program Mode—Used in conjnunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in
(1 bit per point) Program mode. See ProgValue.
0 = Use ProgValue (Off or On)
1 = Hold Last State
ProgValue DINT Program Value—Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program
(1 bit per point) mode. See ProgMode.
0 = Off
1 = On
ProgToFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Transition—Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communication failure
(1 byte per module) occurs in Program mode. Otherwise outputs remain in Program mode. See ProgMode, ProgValue, FaultMode, FaultValue.
0 = Outputs stay in Program mode if a communication failure occurs.
1 = Outputs go to FaultMode if a communication failure occurs.
Table 48 - Diagnostic Output Module Input Data Tags

CSTTimestamp DINT[2] Coordinated System Time Timestamp—Timestamp of diagnostic input data including fusing (see BlownFuse,
(8 bytes) NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault, FieldPwrLoss), which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away.
Data DINT Output Echo Status—Off/On status for the output point echoed back from the output module. This is used to verify
(1 bit per point) proper communication only. No field side verification is done. For field side verification, see OutputVerifyFault.
0 = Off
1 = On
Fault DINT Fault Status—Indicates whether a point is faulted. Faulted I/O data for that point may be incorrect. Check other
(1 bit per point) diagnostic faults, if they are available, for further diagnosis of the root cause. If communication to the input module is lost
or inhibited, then all points for the module are faulted by the processor.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault (FuseBlown, NoLoad, OutputVerifyFault, FieldPwrLoss, or CommFault)
FieldPwrLoss DINT Field Power Loss—AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is disconnected from the module. No Load
(1 bit per point) also is detected.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault
FuseBlown DINT Fuse Is Blown—An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short-circuit condition for an output point. All
(1 bit per point) FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault
NoLoad DINT No Load—Diagnostic that indicates the absence of a load (such as, the wire is disconnected from the module). This
(1 bit per group) diagnostic operates only in the Off state
0 = No fault
1 = Fault
OutputVerifyFault DINT Output Verify—Diagnostic that indicates that the input has been commanded to the On state but the output has not
(1 bit per point) been verified to be On.
0 = No fault
1 = Fault (output is not On)
Table 49 - Diagnostic Output Module Output Data Tags

CSTTimestamp DINT[2] Coordinated System Time Timestamp—Timestamp to be used with scheduled outputs and coordinated system time
(8 bytes) (CST). Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time (CST timestamp) at which the output module
is to apply its outputs.
Data DINT Output Status—Status for the output point originating from the controller.
1 = On

Fast Input Module Tags The ControlLogix 1756-IB16IF fast input module has four types of tags:


controller or a listening peer module containing the current operational
status of the module.
• Output—Structure of output data processed by the input module.
IMPORTANT Output tag information is sent to the 1756-IB16IF module only at the RPI
For example, the rung shown contains an IOT instruction for a fast input
• Event—Structure of event data continually sent from the I/O module to

the controller or a listening module containing the current operational
status of the module.
Fast input modules use array data structures. Array data structures differ from
the flat data structures of other digital I/O modules. For more information, see
Redundant Owner Configuration Tags on page 214.
IMPORTANT The Module Definition column in each table lists the connection type and
input data type combinations that are required to create the corresponding
tag. For more information about defining connection and input data types,
see Create a New Module on page 125.

Table 50 - 1756-IB16IF Module Configuration Tags

Name Data Type Tag Definition Module Definition
LatchTimestamps BOOL Latch Timestamps—Latches a CIP Sync timestamp for a COS transition: Connection = Data
• When an initial timestamp is latched, timestamps for subsequent COS transitions are Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
dropped. or
• Once a latched timestamp is acknowledged via the corresponding bit in the Connection = Data with Event
Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck or Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck tag, the timestamp is overridden
upon the next COS transition. Input Data = Timestamp Data
Requires COS to be enabled via the Pt[x].COSOffOnEn or Pt[x].COSOnOff tags. For more
0 = Timestamps are overridden with each successive COS transition.
1 = Timestamps are latched until acknowledged.
FilterOffOn INT Filter Time Off to On—Defines how long an Off to On input transition must remain in Connection = Data
the On state before the module considers the transition valid. For more information, see Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
page 86. or
Valid filter time = 0…30,000 μs Connection = Data with Event
Input Data = Timestamp Data
FilterOnOff INT Filter Time On to Off—Defines how long an On to Off input transition must remain in Connection = Data
the Off state before the module considers the transition valid. For more information, see Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
page 86. or
Valid filter time = 0…30,000 μs Connection = Data with Event
Pt[x].FilterEn BOOL Filter—If enabled for a point, input transitions must remain in the new state for a Connection = Data
configured length of time before the module considers the transition valid. For more Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
information, see page 86. or
0 = Filtering is disabled. Connection = Data with Event
1 = Filtering is enabled. Input Data = Timestamp Data
Pt[x].COSOffOnEn BOOL Change of State Off to On—If enabled for a point, an Off to On transition triggers a Connection = Data
timestamp recording and sends a COS message on the backplane. For more information, Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
see page 48. or
0 = COS data is not produced upon an Off to On transition. Connection = Data with Event
1 = COS data is produced upon an Off to On transition. Input Data = Timestamp Data
Pt[x].COSOnOffEn BOOL Change of State On to Off—If enabled for a point, an On to Off transition triggers a Connection = Data
timestamp recording and sends a COS message on the backplane. For more information, Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
see page 48. or
0 = COS data is not produced upon an On to Off transition. Connection = Data with Event
1 = COS data is produced upon an On to Off transition. Input Data = Timestamp Data
Table 51 - 1756-IB16IF Module Input Tags

Fault DINT Fault Status—Indicates whether a point is faulted. If communication to the input Connection = Data or Listen Only
module is lost, then all 32 bits are set. For more information, see page 103. Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
0 = No fault or
1 = Fault Connection = Data with Event or Listen
Only with Event
LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Offset—Indicates the offset in microseconds between the current CST Connection = Data, Data with Event,
and the CIP Sync value when a valid CIP Sync time is available. Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event
OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset—Indicates when the CIP Sync time was last updated. The Connection = Data, Data with Event,
timestamp is in CIP Sync time. Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event
GrandMasterClockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID—Indicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection = Data, Data with Event,
module is synced. Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event

Table 51 - 1756-IB16IF Module Input Tags (continued)

Pt[x].Data BOOL Input Status—Indicates whether an input point is On or Off. Connection = Data or Listen Only
0 = The input point is Off. Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
1 = The input point is On. or
Connection = Data with Event or Listen
Only with Event
Pt[x].Fault BOOL Quality of Data after Fault—Indicates whether input data for a faulted point is Connection = Data or Listen Only
correct or incorrect. Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
0 = No fault or
1 = Fault Connection = Data with Event or Listen
Only with Event
Pt[x].NewDataOffOn BOOL New Data Off to On—Captures short duration pulses for Off to On transitions. A Connection = Data or Listen Only
captured pulse remains latched until acknowledged via the Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
output tag. For more information, see page 82. or
0 = No new Off to On transitions have occurred since the last acknowledgement. Connection = Data with Event or Listen
1 = A new Off to On transition has occurred, but has not yet been acknowledged. Only with Event
Pt[x].NewDataOnOff BOOL New Data On to Off—Captures short duration pulses for On to Off transitions. A Connection = Data or Listen Only
pulse remains latched until acknowledged via the Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck output tag. Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
For more information, see page 82. or
0 = No new On to Off transitions have occurred since the last acknowledgement. Connection = Data with Event or Listen
1 = A new On to Off transition has occurred, but has not yet been acknowledged. Only with Event
Pt[x].TimestampDropped BOOL Dropped Timestamp—Indicates whether a timestamp was lost as a result of one of Connection = Data, Data with Event,
the following: Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event
• The corresponding bit was set in the LatchTimestamps configuration tag, so a new Input Data = Timestamp Data
timestamp was not recorded because the previous timestamp was latched.
• The corresponding bit in the LatchTimestamps configuration tag was not set, but a
timestamp was replaced by a new timestamp because the previous timestamp was
not acknowledged via the Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck or Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck
output tags.
0 = A timestamp was not dropped.
1 = A timestamp was dropped.
Pt[x].CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid—Indicates whether CIP Sync is available on the backplane. Connection = Data, Data with Event,
0 = CIP Sync is not available. Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event
1 = CIP Sync is available. Input Data = Timestamp Data
Pt[x].CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout—Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has Connection = Data, Data with Event,
timed out. Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event
0 = A time master is either not detected on the backplane or is valid. See Input Data = Timestamp Data
Pt[x].CIPSyncValid.
1 = A valid time master was detected on the backplane, but the time master has timed
out.
Pt[x].InputOverrideStatus BOOL Input Override Status—Indicates whether local inputs are being overridden by the Connection = Data, Data with Event,
value in the Pt.[x].DataOverrideValue output tag because the corresponding bit in the Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event
Pt[x].DataOverrideEn output tag is set. Input Data = Timestamp Data
0 = Inputs are not being overridden.
1 = Inputs are being overridden.
Pt[x].Timestamp.OffOn DINT Off to On Timestamp—Records a 64-bit timestamp for the input point’s last Connection = Data, Data with Event,
transition to On. The timestamp is in CIP Sync time. Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event
Pt[x].Timestamp.OnOff DINT On to Off Timestamp—Records a 64-bit timestamp for the input point’s last Connection = Data, Data with Event,
transition to Off. The timestamp is in CIP Sync time. Listen Only, or Listen Only with Event

Table 52 - 1756-IB16IF Module Output Tags

ResetTimestamps BOOL Reset Timestamp—When set, clears all timestamps when a rising edge occurs. Connection = Data or Data with Event
0 = Timestamps are not reset. Input Data = Timestamp Data
1 = Timestamps are reset when a rising edge occurs.
ResetEvents BOOL Reset Event—When set, clears all events in the Event[x].NewEvent and Connection = Data with Event
Event[x].Timestamp tags when a rising edge occurs. Input Data = Timestamp Data
0 = Events are not cleared.
1 = Events are cleared when a rising edge occurs.
LatchEvents BOOL Latch Event—When set, latches an event until the event is acknowledged. Once Connection = Data with Event
acknowledged, the event is overridden by a new event. Input Data = Timestamp Data
0 = Events are overridden by new events.
1 = Events are latched until acknowledged, and new events are ignored.
Pt[x].NewDataOffOnAck BOOL Acknowledge Off to On Transition—A rising edge acknowledges Off to On Connection = Data
transitions by clearing the corresponding bits in the Pt[x].Timestamp.OffOn[x] and Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
Pt[x].NewDataOffOn input tags. or
0 = Off to On transitions are not acknowledged. Connection = Data with Event
1 = Off to On transitions are acknowledged on the initial tranisition to 1 of this bit. Input Data = Timestamp Data
Pt[x].NewDataOnOffAck BOOL Acknowledge On to Off Transition—A rising edge acknowledges On to Off Connection = Data
transitions by clearing the corresponding bits in the Pt[x].Timestamp.OnOff[x] and Input Data = Data or Timestamp Data
Pt[x].NewDataOnOff input tags. or
0 = On to Off transitions are not acknowledged. Connection = Data with Event
1 = On to Off transitions are acknowledged on the initial tranisition to 1 of this bit. Input Data = Timestamp Data
Pt[x].DataOverrideEn BOOL Override Data—When set, simulates an input transition when in Run mode by Connection = Data or Data with Event
overriding the actual input state with the value defined in the Pt[x].DataOverrideValue Input Data = Timestamp Data
output tag. This function is useful for validating timestamping.
0 = The state of an input device is not being overridden.
1 = The state of an input device is being overridden by the value defined in the
Pt[x].DataOverride output tag.
Pt[x].DataOverrideValue BOOL Override Data Value—Defines the value to be applied to the input point when the Connection = Data or Data with Event
corresponding bit in the Pt[x].DataOverrideEn tag is enabled. Input Data = Timestamp Data
0 = The input state is Off. A timestamp is recorded in the Pt[x].Timestamp.OnOff[x]
input tag on a falling edge.
1 = The input state is On. A timestamp is recorded in the Pt[x].Timestamp.OffOn[x]
input tag on a rising edge.
Event[x].Mask INT Event Mask—When enabled for a point, an event is triggered when the state of the Connection = Data with Event
input matches the value of the corresponding bits in the Event[x].Value tag. For more Input Data = Timestamp Data
Event[x].Value INT Event Value—Defines whether an input point must be in the On or Off state before Connection = Data with Event
an event is triggered. An event is only triggered if the corresponding bits in the Input Data = Timestamp Data
Event[x].Mask tag is enabled. For more information, see page 89.
0 = The input must be in the Off state to trigger an event.
1 = The input must be in the On state to trigger an event.
Event[x].Disarm BOOL Disarm Event—Prevents events from being triggered for a point via the pattern Connection = Data with Event
defined in the Event[x].Mask and Event[x].Value tags. For more information, see Input Data = Timestamp Data
page 89.
0 = Events are triggered.
1 = Events are not triggered.
Event[x].NewEventAck BOOL Acknowledge New Event—When set, acknowledges a new event has occurred as Connection = Data with Event
indicated by the Event[x].NewEvent event tag. Input Data = Timestamp Data
0 = A new event has not been acknowledged.
1 = A new event has been acknowledged.

Table 53 - 1756-IB16IF Module Event Tags

Fault DINT Fault Status—Indicates whether a point is faulted. If communication to the input Connection = Data with Event or Listen
module is lost, then all 32 bits are set. For more information, see page 103. Only with Event
0 = No fault has occurred. Input Data = Timestamp Data
1 = A fault has occurred.
Event[x].NewEvent BOOL New Event—Indicates whether a new event has occurred. This bit is cleared only Connection = Data with Event or Listen
when acknowledged by the Event[x].NewEventAck output tag or reset by the Only with Event
ResetEvents output tag. Input Data = Timestamp Data
0 = No new event has occurred since the last acknowledged event.
1 = A new event has occurred since the last acknowledged event.
Event[x].EventDropped BOOL Event Dropped—Indicates whether an event has been dropped: Connection = Data with Event or Listen
• If the LatchEvents output tag is set, the last recorded event is retained until Only with Event
acknowledged, and a subsequent event is dropped. Input Data = Timestamp Data
• If the LatchEvents output tag is cleared, the last unacknowledged event is
overwritten.
0 = An event has not been dropped.
1 = An event has been dropped.
Event[x].CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Valid—Indicates whether a valid CIP Sync time master existed on the Connection = Data with Event or Listen
backplane at the time of an event. Only with Event
0 = CIP Sync was not available on the backplane at the time of an event. Input Data = Timestamp Data
1 = CIP Sync was available on the backplane at the time of an event.
Event[x].CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timout—Indicates that a valid CIP Sync time master existed on the Connection = Data with Event or Listen
backplane at the time of an event, but has since timed out. Only with Event
0 = CIP Sync has not timed out. Input Data = Timestamp Data
1 = CIP Sync was available on the backplane, but has since timed out prior to the
event occurring.
Event[x].Data INT Module Data—Shows the input data for all 16 points on the module at the time an Connection = Data with Event or Listen
event occurs. Data for bits 0…15 is shown as a bit mask where bit 0 is Pt[0].Data and Only with Event
bit 15 is Pt[15].Data. Input Data = Timestamp Data
0 = On a per bit basis, indicates the corresponding bit in the Pt[x].Data input tag was
Off when the event occurred.
1 = On a per bit basis, indicates the corresponding bit in the Pt[x].Data input tag was
On when the event occurred.
Event[x].Timestamp DINT Event Timestamp—Records a 64-bit timestamp in CIP Sync format at the time an Connection = Data with Event or Listen
event occurs. Only with Event

Fast Output Module Tags ControlLogix fast output modules have three types of tags:

module upon powerup

controller containing the current operational status of the module
• Output—Structure of data continually sent from the controller to the

I/O module that can modify the module behavior
IMPORTANT The Module Definition column in each table lists the connection type and
input data type combinations that are required to create the corresponding
tag. For more information about defining connection and input data types,
see Create a New Module on page 125.
Topic Page
1756-OB16IEF Module 196
1756-OB16IEFS Module 205
1756-OB16IEF Module
IMPORTANT Output tag information is sent to the 1756-OB16IEF module only at the RPI
For example, the rung shown contains an IOT instruction for a fast output
The 1756-OB16IEF module uses array data structures. Array data structures
differ from the flat data structures of other digital I/O modules. For more
information, see Redundant Owner Configuration Tags on page 214.

Table 54 - 1756-OB16IEF Module Configuration Tags

ProgToFaultEn BOOL Program to Fault Mode—Enables the transition of outputs to Fault mode if a Connection = Data
communication failure occurs in Program mode. Otherwise, outputs remain in Output Data = Data or Scheduled
Program mode. See Pt[x].FaultMode, Pt[x]FaultValue Pt[x]ProgMode, and per Module
Pt[x]ProgValue. or
0 = Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails. Connection = Peer Ownership
1 = Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails. Output Data = Data with Peer
InputPartnerSlot SINT Peer Partner Slot—Identifies the slot number of the local chassis where the peer Connection = Peer Ownership
input module resides. Output Data = Data with Peer
Valid values:
• 0…16
• -1 = No input module has been identified as a peer.
InputPartnerID SINT Peer Partner ID—Identifies the peer input module that controls outputs on the Connection = Peer Ownership
1756-OB16IEF module. The type of module determines the connection type of format Output Data = Data with Peer
of input data.
Valid values:
0 = None (default)
1 = 1756-IB16IF
2 = 1756-LSC8XIB8I
Pt[x].FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode—Used in conjunction with the Pt[x].FaultValue tag to determine the Connection = Data
state of outputs when a communication failure occurs. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = Uses the output value defined in the Pt[x].FaultValue configuration tag (default). per Module
1 = Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the or
Pt[x].FaultValueStateDuration tag. If PWM is enabled for the output point and the Connection = Peer Ownership
output is currently On, the output continues PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a Output Data = Data with Peer
final fault state goes into effect via the Pt[x].FaultFinalState tag.
Pt[x].FaultValue BOOL Fault Value—Defines the output value when a fault occurs. Holds the configured Connection = Data
state of the output for the length of time defined in the Pt[x].FaultValueStateDuration Output Data = Data or Scheduled
tag. per Module
Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared. or
0 = Off Connection = Peer Ownership
1 = On Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State—Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection = Data
Pt[x].FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = Output turns Off once the time in the Pt[x].FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses, per Module
and module is still faulted. or
1 = Output turns On once the time in the Pt[x].FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses, Connection = Peer Ownership
and module is still faulted. Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].ProgMode BOOL Program Mode—Used in conjunction with the Pt[x].ProgValue tag to determine the Connection = Data
state of outputs when the controller is in Program mode. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = Uses the output value defined in the Pt[x].ProgValue tag (default). per Module
1 = Holds the last state of the output. If PWM is enabled for the output point and the or
output is currently On, the output continues to use PWM until the cycle limit is Connection = Peer Ownership
reached. Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].ProgValue BOOL Program Value—Defines the output state during Program mode. Requires the Connection = Data
corresponding bit for the Pt[x].ProgMode tag to be cleared. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = The output state is Off during Program mode. per Module
1 = The output state is On during Program mode. or
Connection = Peer Ownership
Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].PWMEnable BOOL Enable PWM—When set, the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the Connection = Data
current PWM configuration. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = PWM is disabled (default). per Module
1 = PWM is enabled, and the output uses PWM when the output is On. or

Table 54 - 1756-OB16IEF Module Configuration Tags (continued)

Pt[x].PWMExtendCycle BOOL Extend PWM Cycle—Determines the output behavior when the value in the Connection = Data
Pt[x]PWMOnTime output tag is less than the value in the Pt[x].PWMMinimunOnTime Output Data = Data or Scheduled
configuration tag. Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable tag. per Module
0 = The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended (default). If the bit is cleared when or
the On time is less than the minimum On time, the output is never enabled. Connection = Peer Ownership
1 = The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time Output Data = Data with Peer
ratio while taking into account the minimum On time.
IMPORTANT: An extension of the pulse cycle is limited to 10 times the cycle time. If
the requested On time is less than 1/10 of the minimum On time, the output remains
Off and the cycle does not extend.
Pt[x].PWMOnTimeInPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent—Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a Connection = Data
percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds. Requires PWM to be enabled via Output Data = Data or Scheduled
the Pt[x].PWMEnable tag. per Module
0 = Defines PWM On time in seconds (default). or
1 = Defines PWM On time as a percentage. Connection = Peer Ownership
Pt[x].PWMStaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs—When set, minimizes the load on the power system by Connection = Data
staggering On transitions for outputs. Otherwise, outputs turn On immediately at the Output Data = Data or Scheduled
start of a cycle. Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable tag. per Module
0 = Does not stagger output On transitions (default). Outputs turn On immediately or
when the Pt[x].Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge. Connection = Peer Ownership
1 = Staggers output On transitions. All outputs configured for PWM staggering turn On Output Data = Data with Peer
at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became
energized simultaneously.
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit—Determines whether to let only a fixed number of pulse Connection = Data
cycles occur. Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable tag. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off (default). per Module
1 = Lets only the number of pulse cycles defined via the Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit tag to or
occur. Connection = Peer Ownership
Pt[x].PWMExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles—Determines whether to execute the number of cycles Connection = Data
defined via the Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic. Requires PWM Output Data = Data or Scheduled
to be enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable tag, and a cycle limit to be enabled via the per Module
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimitEnable tag. or
0 = The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce (default). Connection = Peer Ownership
1 = The Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce Output Data = Data with Peer
regardless of output logic. For example, if you specify a cycle limit of 4, and the output
turns Off after 3 cycles, all 4 cycles still occur despite the output being instructed to
turn Off.
Pt[x].FaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration—Defines the length of time that the output state remains in Connection = Data
the Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off. The Fault mode Output Data = Data or Scheduled
state is defined in the Pt[x].FaultValue tag. per Module
Valid values: or
• 0 = Hold forever (default). Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault Connection = Peer Ownership
condition persists.
• 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit—Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output Connection = Data
turns On: Output Data = Data or Scheduled
• If the corresponding bit in the Pt[x].PWMExecuteAllCycles tag is set, the configured per Module
number of cycles occur even if the output turns Off. or
• If the corresponding bit in the Pt[x].PWMExecuteAllCycles tag is cleared, the Connection = Peer Ownership
configured number of cycles occur only if the output remains On. For example, if the Output Data = Data with Peer
cycle limit is 4, and the output turns Off after 3 cycles, the 4th cycle does not occur.
The default cycle limit is 10.
Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable tag, and cycle limits to be
enabled via the Pt[x].PWMCycleLimitEnable tag.

Table 54 - 1756-OB16IEF Module Configuration Tags (continued)

Pt[x].PWMMinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time—Defines the minimum length of time required for the Connection = Data
output to turn On. Requires PWM to be enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable tag. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
Valid values: per Module
0.0002…3600.0 seconds or
or Connection = Peer Ownership
0…100 percent Output Data = Data with Peer
OutputMap[x].AndToControllerData INT Controller Data with AND Logic—Determines the output state by applying AND Connection = Peer Ownership
logic to these sources: Output Data = Data with Peer
• Corresponding bits from the controller’s output data (O:Data)
• Other mapped bits specified in the output configuration
OutputMap[x].OrToControllerData INT Controller Data with OR Logic—Determines the output state by applying OR logic Connection = Peer Ownership
to these sources: Output Data = Data with Peer
• Corresponding bits from the controller’s output data (O:Data)
OutputMap[x].AndToPeerInput INT Peer Data with AND Logic—Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection = Peer Ownership
these sources: Output Data = Data with Peer
• Corresponding bits from peer input data (I:Data)
OutputMap[x].OrToPeerInput INT Peer Data with OR Logic—Determines the output state by applying OR logic to Connection = Peer Ownership
• Corresponding bits from peer input data (I:Data)
OutputMap[x].AndToPeerWindow0 SINT Peer Data with AND Logic—Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection = Peer Ownership
• Corresponding bits from window 0 of the peer counter module
(I:Counter[x].InputWindow0)
OutputMap[x].OrToPeerWindow0 SINT Peer Data with OR Logic—Determines the output state by applying OR logic to Connection = Peer Ownership
OutputMap[x].AndToPeerWindow1 SINT Peer Data with AND Logic—Determines the output state by applying AND logic to Connection = Peer Ownership
OutputMap[x].OrToPeerWindow1 SINT Peer Data with OR Logic—Determines the output state by applying OR logic to Connection = Peer Ownership

Table 55 - 1756-OB16IEF Module Input Data Tags

Fault DINT Fault Status—Indicates whether a point is faulted. If communication to the output Connection = Data
module is lost, then all 32 bits of the Module Fault word are set. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = No fault per Module
1 = Fault or
Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
or
GrandMasterClockID DINT Grandmaster Clock ID—Indicates the ID of the CIP Sync Grandmaster to which the Connection = Data
module is synced. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
per Module
or
Output Data = None
or
InputPartnerActive BOOL Input Partner is Active—Indicates whether the peer input module is actively Connection = Peer Ownership
producing input data to be consumed by a 1756-OB16IEF module. Output Data = Data with Peer
0 = No input peer module is currently producing input data to be consumed by a
1756-OB16IEF module.
1 = The input peer module is actively producing input data to be consumed by a
1756-OB16IEF module for use in its peer logic.
InputPartnerFault BOOL Input Partner Fault—Indicates whether the peer input module has faulted due to a Connection = Peer Ownership
connection loss. If the peer input module is faulted, the output module uses only Output Data = Data with Peer
controller data to determine the output state.
0 = The input peer module has not faulted.
1 = The input peer module has faulted and outputs transition to the configured Fault
mode state.
InputPartnerSlot SINT Input Partner Slot—Indicates the slot number of the peer input module. Connection = Peer Ownership
Valid values: Output Data = Data with Peer
• 0…16
• -1 = No peer input module is defined.
InputPartnerStatus SINT Input Partner Status—Indicates the status of the peer input module. Connection = Peer Ownership
Valid values: Output Data = Data with Peer
2 = Communication Fault (Peer connection is lost)
6 = Run (Peer connection open and in Run mode)
LocalClockOffset DINT Local Clock Timestamp—Indicates the offset between the current CST and the CIP Connection = Data
Sync value when a valid CIP Sync time is available. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
per Module
or
Output Data = None
or

Table 55 - 1756-OB16IEF Module Input Data Tags (continued)

OffsetTimestamp DINT Timestamp Offset—Indicates when the CIP Sync LocalClockOffset and Connection = Data
GrandMasterID were last updated in CIP Sync format. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
per Module
or
Output Data = None
or
OwnerActive BOOL Owner Active—Indicates that the output has a controlling owner. B4
OwnerID BOOL Owner ID—Indicates which owner is active (controlling): B5
0 = Owner A
1 = Owner B
OwnerAConnected BOOL Owner A Connected—Indicates that Owner A is connected. B6
OwnerAClaim BOOL Owner A Claim—Indicates that Owner A is claiming outputs (COO). B7
OwnerAReady BOOL Owner A Ready—Indicates that Owner A is Ready to claim outputs (ROO). B8
OwnerBConnected BOOL Owner B Connected—Indicates that Owner B is connected. B9
OwnerBClaim BOOL Owner B Claim—Indicates that Owner B is claiming outputs (COO). B10
OwnerBReady BOOL Owner B Ready—Indicates that Owner B is Ready to claim outputs (ROO). B11
Pt[x].Data BOOL Data—Indicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point. If Connection = Data
PWM is enabled, this value transitions from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = Off per Module
1 = On or
Output Data = None
or
Pt[x].Fault BOOL Fault—Indicates whether I/O data for the corresponding point may be incorrect due Connection = Data
to a fault. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = No fault. per Module
1 = A fault exists and I/O data may be incorrect. or
Any of these conditions set the bit for this tag: Connection = Listen Only
• Pt[x].FuseBlown = 1 Output Data = None
• Pt[x].PWMCycleTime outside the valid range of 0.001…3600.0 seconds or
• Pt[x].PWMOnTime outside the valid range of 0.0002…3600.0 seconds Connection = Peer Ownership
or 0…100 percent
• Pt[x].PWMCycleTime ≤ Pt[x].PWMOnTime
Pt[x].FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown—Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload Connection = Data
condition for the corresponding point. All blown fuse conditions are latched and must Output Data = Data or Scheduled
be reset. per Module
0 = Fuse is not blown. or
1 = Fuse is blown and has not been reset. Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
or


Pt[x].PWMCycleLimitDone BOOL PWM Cycle Limit Done—Indicates whether the PWM pulse cycle limit defined in the Connection = Data
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit configuration tag has been reached. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = The PWM cycle limit has not yet been reached. The bit resets to 0 each time the per Module
output transitions to On to begin a new PWM cycle. or
1 = The PWM cycle limit has been reached. Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
or
Pt[x].CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid—Indicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Connection = Data
Sync time master on the backplane. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = CIP Sync is not available. per Module
1 = CIP Sync is available. or
Output Data = None
or
Pt[x].CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout—Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has Connection = Data
timed out. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
0 = A valid time master has not timed out. per Module
1 = A valid time master was detected on the backplane, but the time master has timed or
out. The module is currently using its local clock. Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
or
Pt[x].OutputOverrideStatus BOOL Output Override Status—Indicates whether local output data or logic point is set Connection = Peer Ownership
up to be overridden by the value in the Pt[x].OverrideOutputValue output tag. Requires Output Data = Data with Peer
the Pt[x].OverrideOutputEn output tag to be enabled.
0 = The override feature for the corresponding output is not enabled.
1 = The override feature for the corresponding output is enabled.
Pt[x].PeerInputOverrideStatus BOOL Peer Input Override Status—Indicates whether peer input data mapped to the Connection = Peer Ownership
corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].OverridePeerInputValue output tag. Requires the O:Pt[x].OverridePeerInputEn
output tag to be enabled.
0 = The override feature for peer inputs is not enabled.
1 = The override feature for peer inputs is enabled.


Pt[x].PeerWindows0OverrideStatus BOOL Peer Window 0 Override Status—Indicates whether peer window 0 data mapped Connection = Peer Ownership
to the corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow0Value output tag. Requires the
O:Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow0En output tag to be enabled.
0 = The override feature for peer window 0 is not enabled.
1 = The override feature for peer window 0 is enabled.
Pt[x].PeerWindow1OverrideStatus BOOL Peer Window 1 Override Status—Indicates whether peer window 1 data mapped Connection = Peer Ownership
to the corresponding output point is set up to be overridden by the value in the Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow1Value output tag. Requires the
O:Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow1En output tag to be enabled.
0 = The override feature for peer window 1 is not enabled.
1 = The override feature for peer window 1 is enabled.
Timestamp DINT Timestamp—A 64-bit CIP Sync timestamp of the last new output data or FuseBlown Connection = Data
event. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
per Module
or
Output Data = None
or

Table 56 - 1756-OB16IEF Module Output Data Tags

Name Data Tag Definition Module Definition
Type
OwnerClaim BOOL B0 When set, indicates that the
controller wants to Claim
0 = Not Requesting Ownership Ownership of the Redundant
connection and have its Outputs
1 = Claim Ownership actively used.
If both Redundant Owners have
COO set, the last originator
application that transitioned its
COO flag from reset to set is the
owner. Only a Rx’d 0 to a 1 and not
just the receipt of a new
connection is considered such a
transition.
If neither Redundant Owner has
COO set, then the highest ROO
becomes the owner.
OwnerReady BOOL B1 Indicates that the controller is
Ready for Output Ownership. A
0 = Not Ready to Own value of 1 indicates ready while 0
indicates that the controller is not
1 = Ready to Own Ready to Own the Outputs.
If neither controller has the COO
bit set, the ROO determines the
current Owner. If both controllers
have COO=0 and ROO=0, then the
Outputs go to IDLE (Program
mode). If both controllers have
COO=0 and ROO=1, OwnerA is
Active.
Pt[x].Data BOOL Data—Indicates the On/Off state to apply to the output point. Connection = Data
0 = Off Output Data = Data or Scheduled
1 = On per Module
or
Pt[x].ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse—Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data Connection = Data
when the bit transitions from Off to On. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
per Module
or
Pt[x].OverrideOutputEn BOOL Override Output—Overrides local output data for peer logic with the value defined Connection = Peer Ownership
in the Pt[x].OverrideOutputValue tag. Output Data = Data with Peer
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Pt[x].OverrideOutputValue BOOL Override Output Value—Indicates the On/Off status to apply to all outputs mapped Connection = Peer Ownership
to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Pt[x].OverrideOutputEn tag is Output Data = Data with Peer
set.
0 = Off
1 = On
Pt[x].OverridePeerInputEn BOOL Override Peer Input—Overrides peer input data mapped to the output point with Connection = Peer Ownership
the value defined in the Pt[x].OverridePeerInputValue output tag. Output Data = Data with Peer
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Table 56 - 1756-OB16IEF Module Output Data Tags (continued)

Type
Pt[x].OverridePeerInputValue BOOL Override Peer Input Value—Indicates the On/Off status to apply to all peer inputs Connection = Peer Ownership
mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].OverridePeerInputEn output tag is enabled.
0 = Off
1 = On
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow0En BOOL Override Peer Window 0—Overrides peer window 0 inputs mapped to the output Connection = Peer Ownership
point with the value defined in the Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow0Value output tag. Output Data = Data with Peer
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow0Value BOOL Override Peer Window 0 Value—Indicates the On/Off status to apply to peer Connection = Peer Ownership
window 0 inputs mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow0En output tag is enabled.
0 = Off
1 = On
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow1En BOOL Override Peer Window 1—Overrides peer window 1 inputs mapped to the output Connection = Peer Ownership
point with the value defined in the Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow1Value output tag. Output Data = Data with Peer
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow1Value BOOL Override Peer Window 1 Value—Indicates the On/Off status to apply to peer Connection = Peer Ownership
window 1 inputs mapped to the output point when the corresponding bit in the Output Data = Data with Peer
Pt[x].OverridePeerWindow1En output tag is enabled.
0 = Off
1 = On
Pt[x].PWMCycleTime REAL PWM Cycle Time—Defines the duration of each pulse cycle. Requires PWM to be Connection = Data
enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable configuration tag. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
Valid values: 0.001…3600.0 seconds per Module
or
Pt[x].PWMOnTime REAL PWM On Time—Defines the length of time that a pulse is active. Requires PWM to be Connection = Data
enabled via the Pt[x].PWMEnable configuration tag. Output Data = Data or Scheduled
Valid values: per Module
0.0002…3600.0 seconds or
or Connection = Peer Ownership
0…100.0 percent Output Data = Data with Peer
Timestamp DINT Timestamp—CIP Sync time at which to apply scheduled output data. Connection = Data
Output Data = Scheduled per
Module
TimestampOffset DINT Timestamp Offset—Indicates the difference between the system time and the Connection = Data
module’s local time. The timestamp is in CIP Sync time. Output Data = Scheduled per
This value is typically set to zero but can be updated with the value of the SystemOffset Module
in the controller’s TIMESYNCHRONIZE object to enable Time Step Compensation in the
module.
1756-OB16IEFS Module
The tag names and data structures for the 1756-OB16IEFS module vary based
on the module definition:
• For Scheduled Per Point output, the module uses a flat data structure.
See Table 57, Table 59, and Table 61.

• For Data output or Listen Only connections, the module uses an array
data structure. See Table 58, Table 60, and Table 62. For more
information about array data structures, see Redundant Owner
Configuration Tags on page 214.
Table 57 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Configuration Tags—Scheduled per Point Output

communication failure occurs in Program mode. Otherwise, outputs remain in Program Output Data = Scheduled per
mode. See FaultMode, FaultValue, ProgMode, and ProgValue. Point
0 = Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails.
1 = Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails.
FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode—Used in conjunction with the FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection = Data
outputs when a communication failure occurs. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = Uses the output value defined in the Pt[x].FaultValue configuration tag (default). Point
1 = Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the
FaultValueStateDuration tag. If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is
currently On, the output continues PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a final fault
state goes into effect via the FaultFinalState tag.
FaultValue BOOL Fault Value—Defines the output value when a fault occurs. Holds the configured Connection = Data
state of the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag. Output Data = Scheduled per
Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared. Point
0 = Off
1 = On
FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State—Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection = Data
FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = Output turns Off once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses, and Point
module is still faulted.
1 = Output turns On once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses, and
ProgMode BOOL Program Mode—Used in conjunction with the ProgValue tag to determine the state Connection = Data
of outputs when the controller is in Program mode. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = Uses the output value defined in the ProgValue tag (default). Point
1 = Holds the last state of the output. If PWM is enabled for the output point and the
output is currently On, the output continues to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached.
ProgValue BOOL Program Value—Defines the output state during Program mode. Requires the Connection = Data
corresponding bit for the ProgMode tag to be cleared. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = The output state is Off during Program mode. Point
1 = The output state is On during Program mode.
FaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration—Defines the length of time that the output state remains in Connection = Data
the Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off. The Fault mode Output Data = Scheduled per
state is defined in the FaultValue tag. Point
Valid values:
• 0 = Hold forever (default). Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault
condition persists.
• 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds
PWM[x].Enable BOOL Enable PWM—When set, the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the Connection = Data
current PWM configuration. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = PWM is disabled (default). Point
1 = PWM is enabled, and the output uses PWM when the output is On.

Table 57 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Configuration Tags—Scheduled per Point Output (continued)

PWM[x].ExtendCycle BOOL Extend PWM Cycle—Determines the output behavior when the value in the Connection = Data
PWM.OnTime output tag is less than the value in the PWM.MinimunOnTime Output Data = Scheduled per
configuration tag. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag. Point
0 = The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended (default). If the bit is cleared when
the On time is less than the minimum On time, the output is never enabled.
1 = The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time
PWM[x].OnTimeInPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent—Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a Connection = Data
percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds. Requires PWM to be enabled via Output Data = Scheduled per
the PWM.Enable tag. Point
0 = Defines PWM On time in seconds (default).
1 = Defines PWM On time as a percentage.
PWM[x].StaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs—When set, minimizes the load on the power system by Connection = Data
staggering On transitions for outputs. Otherwise, outputs turn On immediately at the Output Data = Scheduled per
start of a cycle. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag. Point
0 = Does not stagger output On transitions (default). Outputs turn On immediately
when the Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge.
1 = Staggers output On transitions. All outputs configured for PWM staggering turns
On at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became
PWM[x].CycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit—Determines whether to let only a fixed number of pulse Connection = Data
cycles occur. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off (default). Point
1 = Lets only the number of pulse cycles defined via the PWM.CycleLimit tag to occur.
PWM[x].ExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles—Determines whether to execute the number of cycles Connection = Data
defined via the PWM.CycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic. Requires PWM to be Output Data = Scheduled per
enabled via the PWM.Enable tag, and a cycle limit to be enabled via the Point
PWM.CycleLimitEnable tag.
0 = The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce (default).
1 = The PWM.CycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce regardless of
output logic. For example, if you specify a cycle limit of 4, and the output turns Off after
3 cycles, all 4 cycles still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off.
PWM[x].CycleLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit—Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output Connection = Data
turns On: Output Data = Scheduled per
• If the corresponding bit in the PWM.ExecuteAllCycles tag is set, the configured Point
number of cycles occur even if the output turns Off.
• If the corresponding bit in the PWM.ExecuteAllCycles tag is cleared, the configured
number of cycles occur only if the output remains On. For example, if the cycle limit
is 4, and the output turns Off after 3 cycles, the 4th cycle does not occur.
Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag, and cycle limits to be enabled
via the PWM.CycleLimitEnable tag.
PWM[x].MinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time—Defines the minimum length of time required for the Connection = Data
output to turn On. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag. Output Data = Scheduled per
Valid values: Point
0.0002…3600.0 seconds
or
0…100 percent

Table 58 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Configuration Tags—Data Output

communication failure occurs in Program mode. Otherwise, outputs remain in Program Output Data = Data
mode. See FaultMode, FaultValue, ProgMode, and ProgValue.
0 = Outputs stay in Program mode if communication fails.
1 = Outputs go to Fault mode if communication fails.
Pt[x].FaultMode BOOL Fault Mode—Used in conjunction with the FaultValue tag to determine the state of Connection = Data
outputs when a communication failure occurs. Output Data = Data
0 = Uses the output value defined in the Pt[x].FaultValue configuration tag (default).
1 = Holds the last state of the output for the length of time defined in the
FaultValueStateDuration tag. If PWM is enabled for the output point and the output is
currently On, the output continues PWM until the cycle limit is reached or a final fault
state goes into effect via the FaultFinalState tag.
Pt[x].FaultValue BOOL Fault Value—Defines the output value when a fault occurs. Holds the configured Connection = Data
state of the output for the length of time defined in the FaultValueStateDuration tag. Output Data = Data
Requires the corresponding bit in the FaultMode tag to be cleared.
0 = Off
1 = On
Pt[x].FaultFinalState BOOL Fault Final State—Determines the final output state once the time in the Connection = Data
FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses. Output Data = Data
0 = Output turns Off once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses, and
1 = Output turns On once the time in the FaultValueStateDuration tag elapses, and
Pt[x].ProgMode BOOL Program Mode—Used in conjunction with the ProgValue tag to determine the state Connection = Data
of outputs when the controller is in Program mode. Output Data = Data
0 = Uses the output value defined in the ProgValue tag (default).
1 = Holds the last state of the output. If PWM is enabled for the output point and the
output is currently On, the output continues to use PWM until the cycle limit is reached.
Pt[x].ProgValue BOOL Program Value—Defines the output state during Program mode. Requires the Connection = Data
corresponding bit for the ProgMode tag to be cleared. Output Data = Data
0 = The output state is Off during Program mode.
1 = The output state is On during Program mode.
Pt[x].PWMEnable BOOL Enable PWM—When set, the pulse train for the output point is controlled by the Connection = Data
current PWM configuration. Output Data = Data
0 = PWM is disabled (default).
1 = PWM is enabled, and the output uses PWM when the output is On.
Pt[x].PWMExtendCycle BOOL Extend PWM Cycle—Determines the output behavior when the value in the Connection = Data
PWM.OnTime output tag is less than the value in the PWM.MinimunOnTime Output Data = Data
configuration tag. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag.
0 = The duration of the pulse cycle is not extended (default). If the bit is cleared when
the On time is less than the minimum On time, the output is never enabled.
1 = The duration of the pulse cycle is extended to maintain the On time to cycle time
Pt[x].PWMOnTimeInPercent BOOL PWM On Time in Percent—Determines whether PWM On time is defined as a Connection = Data
percentage of the cycle time or is defined in seconds. Requires PWM to be enabled via Output Data = Data
the PWM.Enable tag.
0 = Defines PWM On time in seconds (default).
1 = Defines PWM On time as a percentage.

Table 58 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Configuration Tags—Data Output (continued)

Pt[x].PWMStaggerOutput BOOL Stagger PWM Outputs—When set, minimizes the load on the power system by Connection = Data
staggering On transitions for outputs. Otherwise, outputs turn On immediately at the Output Data = Data
start of a cycle. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag.
0 = Does not stagger output On transitions (default). Outputs turn On immediately
when the Data tag is set to 1 beginning the PWM cycle with a rising edge.
1 = Staggers output On transitions. All outputs configured for PWM staggering turn On
at different intervals to minimize a possible power surge if many outputs became
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimitEnable BOOL Enable PWM Cycle Limit—Determines whether to let only a fixed number of pulse Connection = Data
cycles occur. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag. Output Data = Data
0 = Pulse cycles continue to occur until the output turns Off (default).
1 = Lets only the number of pulse cycles defined via the PWM.CycleLimit tag to occur.
Pt[x].PWMExecuteAllCycles BOOL Execute All PWM Cycles—Determines whether to execute the number of cycles Connection = Data
defined via the PWM.CycleLimit tag regardless of the output logic. Requires PWM to be Output Data = Data
enabled via the PWM.Enable tag, and a cycle limit to be enabled via the
PWM.CycleLimitEnable tag.
0 = The output logic determines the number of cycles to produce (default).
1 = The PWM.CycleLimit tag determines the number of cycles to produce regardless of
output logic. For example, if you specify a cycle limit of 4, and the output turns Off after
3 cycles, all 4 cycles still occur despite the output being instructed to turn Off.
Pt[x].PWMFaultValueStateDuration SINT Fault State Duration—Defines the length of time that the output state remains in Connection = Data
the Fault mode state before transitioning to a final state of On or Off. The Fault mode Output Data = Data
state is defined in the FaultValue tag.
Valid values:
• 0 = Hold forever (default). Output remains in Fault mode for as long as the fault
condition persists.
• 1, 2, 5, or 10 seconds
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit SINT PWM Cycle Limit—Defines the number of pulse cycles to occur when the output Connection = Data
turns On: Output Data = Data
• If the corresponding bit in the PWM.ExecuteAllCycles tag is set, the configured
number of cycles occur even if the output turns Off.
• If the corresponding bit in the PWM.ExecuteAllCycles tag is cleared, the configured
number of cycles occur only if the output remains On. For example, if the cycle limit
is 4, and the output turns Off after 3 cycles, the 4th cycle does not occur.
Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag, and cycle limits to be enabled
via the PWM.CycleLimitEnable tag.
Pt[x].PWMMinimumOnTime REAL PWM Minimum On Time—Defines the minimum length of time required for the Connection = Data
output to turn On. Requires PWM to be enabled via the PWM.Enable tag. Output Data = Data
Valid values:
0.0002…3600.0 seconds
or
0…100 percent

Table 59 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Input Data Tags—Scheduled per Point Output

module is lost, then all 32 bits of the Module Fault word are set. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = No fault Point
1 = Fault or
Output Data = None
Data BOOL Data—Indicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point. If Connection = Data
PWM is enabled, this value does transition from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = Off Point
1 = On or
Output Data = None
FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown—Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload Connection = Data
condition for the corresponding point. All blown fuse conditions are latched and must Output Data = Scheduled per
be reset. Point
0 = Fuse is not blown. or
1 = Fuse is blown and has not been reset. Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid—Indicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Connection = Data
Sync time master on the backplane. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = CIP Sync is not available. Point
1 = CIP Sync is available. or
Output Data = None
CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout—Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has Connection = Data
timed out. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = A valid time master has not timed out. Point
1 = A valid time master was detected on the backplane, but the time master has timed or
out. The module is currently using its local clock. Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
LateScheduleCount INT Late Schedule Count—Increments each time a schedule is received late after its Connection = Data
scheduled time. The counter rolls over every 65,535 late schedules. Output Data = Scheduled per
If a late schedule is the most recent schedule for a point, the output is still driven to Point
new state.
Monitoring the late schedule count may be useful to determine whether network
delays or connection losses are impacting schedules.
LostScheduleCount INT Lost Schedule Count—Increments each time the Schedule.SequenceNumber output Connection = Data
tag skips a value. A skipped sequence number may indicate a lost schedule. The counter Output Data = Scheduled per
rolls over every 65,535 lost schedules. Point
Sync value when a valid CIP Sync time is available. Output Data = Scheduled per
Point
or
Output Data = None
GrandMasterID were last updated in CIP Sync format. Output Data = Scheduled per
Point
or
Output Data = None

Table 59 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Input Data Tags—Scheduled per Point Output (continued)
module is synced. Output Data = Scheduled per
Point
or
Output Data = None
event. Output Data = Scheduled per
Point
or
Output Data = None
Schedule.State SINT Schedule State—Indicates the current sequence number of schedules stored in the Connection = Data
output data. Output Data = Scheduled per
Point
Schedule.SequenceNumber SINT Schedule Sequence Number—The data echo indicating the sequence number of Connection = Data
the schedule. Output Data = Scheduled per
Point
Table 60 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Input Data Tags—Data Output or Listen Only Connections
module is lost, then all 32 bits of the Fault word are set. Output Data = Data
0 = No fault or
1 = Fault Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
Pt[x].Data BOOL Data—Indicates the current value to be sent to the corresponding output point. If Connection = Data
PWM is enabled, this value transitions from 0 to 1 based on the PWM pulse train. Output Data = Data
0 = Off or
1 = On Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
Pt[x].Fault BOOL Fault Status—Indicates whether a point is faulted. If communication to the output Connection = Data
module is lost, then all 32 bits of the Fault word are set. Output Data = Data
0 = No fault or
1 = Fault Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None
Pt[x].FuseBlown BOOL Fuse Is Blown—Indicates whether a fuse has blown due to a short or overload Connection = Data
condition for the corresponding point. All blown fuse conditions are latched and must Output Data = Data
be reset. or
0 = Fuse is not blown. Connection = Listen Only
1 = Fuse is blown and has not been reset. Output Data = None
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimitDone BOOL PWM Cycle Limit Done—Indicates whether the PWM pulse cycle limit defined in the Connection = Data
Pt[x].PWMCycleLimit configuration tag has been reached. Output Data = Data
0 = The PWM cycle limit has not yet been reached. The bit resets to 0 each time the or
output transitions to On to begin a new PWM cycle. Connection = Listen Only
1 = The PWM cycle limit has been reached. Output Data = None
Pt[x].CIPSyncValid BOOL CIP Sync Is Valid—Indicates whether the module has synchronized to a valid CIP Connection = Data
Sync time master on the backplane. Output Data = Data
0 = CIP Sync is not available. or
1 = CIP Sync is available. Connection = Listen Only
Output Data = None

Table 60 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Input Data Tags—Data Output or Listen Only Connections (continued)
Pt[x].CIPSyncTimeout BOOL CIP Sync Timeout—Indicates whether a valid time master on the backplane has Connection = Data
timed out. Output Data = Data
0 = A valid time master has not timed out. or
1 = A valid time master was detected on the backplane, but the time master has timed Connection = Listen Only
out. The module is currently using its local clock. Output Data = None
Sync value when a valid CIP Sync time is available. Output Data = Data
or
Output Data = None
GrandMasterID were last updated in CIP Sync format. Output Data = Data
or
Output Data = None
module is synced. Output Data = Data
or
Output Data = None
event. Output Data = Data
or
Output Data = None
Table 61 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Output Data Tags—Scheduled per Point Output

Type
Data BOOL Data—Indicates the On/Off state to apply to a nonscheduled output point. Connection = Data
0 = Off Output Data = Scheduled per
1 = On Point
ScheduleMask BOOL Schedule Mask—A mask indicating which output points are scheduled. Connection = Data
0 = The output point is unscheduled. The On/Off state is determined by the value in the Output Data = Scheduled per
Data output tag. Point
1 = The output point is scheduled. The On/Off state is determined by the
Schedule[x].Data output tag.
ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse—Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data Connection = Data
when the bit transitions from Off to On. Output Data = Scheduled per
Point
TimestampOffset DINT Timestamp Offset—Indicates the difference between the system time and the Connection = Data
module’s local time. The timestamp is in CIP Sync time. Output Data = Scheduled per
This value is typically set to zero but can be updated with the value of the SystemOffset Point
in the controller’s TIMESYNCHRONIZE object to enable Time Step Compensation in the
module.
ScheduleTimestamp DINT Schedule Timestamp—The baseline CIP Sync time for all schedules. The module Connection = Data
uses the baseline CIP Sync time combined with the offset value in the Schedule.Offset Output Data = Scheduled per
tag to calculate the absolute time a physical output turns On or Off. Point
Schedule[x].ID SINT Schedule ID—Identifies which schedule to apply to an output point. Connection = Data
Valid schedules: 1…32 Output Data = Scheduled per
0= No schedule Point

Table 61 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Output Data Tags—Scheduled per Point Output (continued)
Type
Schedule[x].SequenceNumber SINT Schedule Sequence Number—Indicates the sequence count received with a Connection = Data
schedule. The module recognizes a new schedule only when there is a change in Output Data = Scheduled per
sequence number. Point
The first message received initializes the schedule.
Schedule[x].OutputPointSelect SINT Schedule Output Point—Indicates which physical output point is associated with a Connection = Data
schedule. The module recognizes a new schedule only when there is a change in output Output Data = Scheduled per
point. Point
The first message received initializes the schedule.
Valid values: 0…15
Schedule[x].Data SINT Schedule Data—Indicates the On/Off state to apply to an output point at the Connection = Data
scheduled time. Output Data = Scheduled per
0 = Off Point
1 = On
Schedule[x].Offset DINT Schedule Offset—Indicates a schedule’s offset value to be added to the baseline Connection = Data
ScheduleTimestamp value to determine the absolute time at which a physical output Output Data = Scheduled per
turns On or Off. Point
The offset value must be +/-35 minutes from the baseline ScheduleTimestamp value.
PWM.CycleTime REAL PWM Cycle Time—Defines the duration of each pulse cycle. Requires PWM to be Connection = Data
enabled via the PWM.Enable configuration tag. Output Data = Scheduled per
Valid values: 0.001…3600.0 seconds Point
PWM.OnTime REAL PWM On Time—Defines the length of time that a pulse is active. Requires PWM to be Connection = Data
enabled via the PWM.Enable configuration tag. Output Data = Scheduled per
Valid values: Point
0.0002…3600.0 seconds
or
0…100.0 percent
Table 62 - 1756-OB16IEFS Module Output Data Tags—Data Output

Type
Pt[x].Data BOOL Data—Indicates the On/Off state to apply to a nonscheduled output point. Connection = Data
0 = Off Output Data = Data
1 = On
Pt[x].ResetFuseBlown BOOL Reset Blown Fuse—Attempts to clear a blown fuse status and apply output data Connection = Data
when the bit transitions from Off to On. Output Data = Data
Pt[x].PWMCycleTime REAL PWM Cycle Time—Defines the duration of each pulse cycle. Requires PWM to be Connection = Data
enabled via the PWM.Enable configuration tag. Output Data = Data
Valid values: 0.001…3600.0 seconds
Pt[x].PWMOnTime REAL PWM On Time—Defines the length of time that a pulse is active. Requires PWM to be Connection = Data
enabled via the PWM.Enable configuration tag. Output Data = Data
Valid values:
0.0002…3600.0 seconds
or
0…100.0 percent

Redundant Owner The redundant owner configuration tags are identical to the existing
1756-OB16IEF configuration.
Configuration Tags
Redundant Owner Input Tag Layout
We added eight Input tags to the existing Input data layout. The bit tag field,
PartnerBits, increased from 2 bits to 10 bits to cover OwnerActive, Owner ID,
and Active/Claim/Ready status for the A and B controllers.
Table 63 - New Redundant Input Tag Description – 1756-OB16IEF
Field Data Type Legal Values Usage
OwnerActive BOOL B4 The Output has a Controlling Owner
OwnerID BOOL B5 Which Owner is Active (Controlling):
0 = Owner A
1 = Owner B
OwnerAConnected BOOL B6 Owner A is Connected.
OwnerAClaim BOOL B7 Owner A is claiming Outputs (COO).
OwnerAReady BOOL B8 Owner A is Ready to claim Outputs (ROO).
OwnerBConnected BOOL B9 Owner B is Connected.
OwnerBClaim BOOL B10 Owner B is claiming Outputs (COO).
OwnerBReady BOOL B11 Owner B is Ready to claim Outputs (ROO).
Redundant Owner Output Tag Layout
We added two Input tags in the Output data: a BOOL to reflect the COO bit
and another for the ROO bit.
Table 64 - New Redundant Output Tag Description – 1756-OB16IEF
Field Data Type Legal Values Usage
OwnerClaim BOOL B0 When set, indicates that the controller wants to Claim Ownership of the redundant
connection and have its outputs actively used.
0 = Not Requesting Ownership • If both Redundant Owners have COO set, the last originator application that transitioned
1 = Claim Ownership its COO flag from reset to set shall be the owner.
NOTE: Only a Rx’d 0 to a 1 and not just the receipt of a new connection is considered such a
transition.
• If neither Redundant Owner has COO set, then the highest ROO becomes Owner.
OwnerReady BOOL B1 Indicates the controller’s readiness for output ownership. A value of 1 indicates ready while
0 indicates the controller is not ready to own the outputs.
0 = Not Ready to Own • If neither controller has the COO bit set, the ROO determines the current owner.
1 = Ready to Own • If both controllers have COO=0 and ROO=0, then the outputs go to IDLE (Program
mode).
• If both controllers have COO=0 and ROO=1, OwnerA will be active.

Array Data Structures Fast digital I/O modules use an array data structure. In this type of structure,
all the tags for a particular point are organized under that point. For example,
in Figure 33, all of the tags that appear under point 0 also appear under points
1…15 for the input module in slot 1. With this structure, you can copy or
access all of the data for a particular point by simply referencing or copying the
point or alias for the point, such as Pt[3] or PressureValveTank3.
Figure 33 - Array Data Structure
Other digital I/O modules use a flat data structure. In this type of structure,
only one instance of a tag exists for a module. For example, in Figure 34, only
one instance of each tag appears under the input module in slot 3. To reference
or copy data for an individual point, you specify the tag name followed by a bit
number, such as Data.0 or EventOverflow.3. Unlike an array structure where all
the data for a point can be accessed via a single tag reference, a flat structure
requires multiple tag references to access all the data for a point.
Figure 34 - Flat Data Structure
The 1756-OB16IEFS module uses either type of data structure depending on

how you configure the module. For more information, see page 205.


Appendix C
Use Ladder Logic To Perform

Run Time Services and Reconfiguration
Topic Page
Using Message Instructions 217
Processing Real-time Control and Module Services 218
One Service Performed Per Instruction 218
Create a New Tag 218
You can use ladder logic to perform run-time services on your module. For
example, page 55 shows how to reset an electronic fuse module by using the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application. This appendix provides an example
of how to reset the same fuse without using the Logix Designer application.
In addition to performing run time services, you can use ladder logic to change
configuration. Chapter 7 explained how to use the Logix Designer application
to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix® digital I/O module.
Some of those parameters may also be changed through ladder logic.
Using Message Instructions In ladder logic, you can use Message instructions to send occasional services to
any ControlLogix I/O module. Message instructions send an explicit service to
the module, causing specific behavior to occur. For example, unlatching a high
alarm can be performed by a message instruction.
Message instructions maintain these characteristics:

• Messages use unscheduled portions of system communication
bandwidth
• One service is performed per instruction
• Performing module services does not impede module functionality, such
as sampling inputs or applying new outputs

Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration
Processing Real-time Control Services sent through message instructions are not as time critical as the
module behavior defined during configuration and maintained by a real-time
and Module Services connection. Therefore, the module processes messaging services only after the
needs of the I/O connection have been met.
For example, you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the module, but
real-time control of your process is still occurring by using the input value from
that same channel. Because the input value is critical to your application, the
module prioritizes the sampling of inputs ahead of the unlatch service request.
This prioritization lets input channels be sampled at the same frequency and
the process alarms to be unlatched in the time between sampling and
producing the real-time input data.
One Service Performed Per A message instruction causes a module service to be performed only once per
execution. For example, if a message instruction sends a service to the module
Instruction to unlatch the high high alarm on a particular channel, that channel’s high high
alarm unlatches, but may be set on a subsequent channel sample. The message
instruction must then be re-executed to unlatch the alarm a second time.
Create a New Tag This section shows how to create a tag in ladder logic when adding a message
instruction. Ladder logic is in the main routine within the Logix
Designer application.
Follow these steps to create a tag.
1. Start the Logix Designer application and open an existing I/O project or
create a new one.
2. On the Controller Organizer, double-click MainTask.
Expand MainProgram to see Main Routine as a sub-menu item.

Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C
A graphic that looks like a ladder, with rungs, appears in the right side of
the Logix Designer application. You attach run-time service, such as a
message instruction, to the rungs and then download the information to
a controller.
You can tell that the rung is in Edit mode because of the ‘e’ at the left side
of the rung.
3. Find, then click MSG (message) instruction on the instruction toolbar.

The MSG icon is among the formats on the Input/Output tab of the
instruction toolbar.
You also can drag-and-drop an instruction icon onto a rung. A green dot
appears when a valid location is detected for the instruction on the rung.
4. Inside the message box in the Message Control field, right-click the
question mark to access a pull-down menu.

5. Choose New Tag.

The New Tag dialog box appears with the cursor in the Name field.
IMPORTANT We suggest you name the tag to indicate what module service the
message instruction is sending. For example, if a message
instruction is to reset an electronic fuse, then name the tag, ‘reset
fuse’, to reflect this.
6. Complete the fields on the New Tag dialog box.

Field Description
Name Type the tag name, including the slot number in the module.
Description Type an option tag description.
Usage Use the default.
Type Use the default.
Alias for Leave blank.
Data Type Choose MESSAGE.
Scope Choose the Controller scope.
Note: Message tags can be created only with the Controller scope.
External Access Use the default.
Style Leave blank.
Constant Leave blank.
Open MESSAGE Configuration Leave the box blank if you do NOT want to automatically access the
Message Configuration screen when OK is clicked.
You still can access the Message Configuration screen later by
following the procedures on page 221.
7. Click OK.

Enter Message Configuration
After creating a tag, you must enter certain parameters for the message
configuration. This information is entered on the Configuration and
Communication tabs of the Message Configuration dialog box.
The Message Configuration dialog box is accessed by clicking the box with the
ellipses (in the Message Control field).

Configuration Tab
The Configuration tab provides information on what module service to

perform and where to perform it.
Table 65 explains the relationship of the fields in the above dialog boxes. For
example, despite different entry fields, both screen examples are configured to
send a message to reset an electronic fuse (module service) on Channel 0 of a
1756-OA8D module (where to perform the service).
Table 65 - Relationship of Message Configuration Parameters

Parameter Description
Service Type Defines the type of module service to be performed. For example, a reset.
Note: In version 10.07.00 or later, you can use a pull-down menu to choose the Service Type. The
application defaults the Service Code, Instance, Class, and Attribute parameters based on the
Service Type that you choose. All values are in Hex.
Class Object that you are sending a message to, such as the device object or a discrete output point.
Instance Each object can have multiple instances. For example, a discrete output can have 16 points or
instances of where a message can be sent. This specifies the instance.
Attribute Further identifies the exact address for the message. An analog input can have multiple alarms so
this attribute acknowledges a specific alarm and not the other alarms. If an attribute is not specified
(default to 0) the Service applies to all attributes of the Class/Instance.
Table 66 lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the message
instructions.
Table 66 - Source and Destination Field Tags
Source Tag Description
Enable_32_Points Parameter used to determine which points are enabled for the service. That is, if
DINT bit 0 = 1 for Reset Fuse, then point 0 has its electronic fuse reset.
Results_32_Points Pass (0)/ Fail (1) result for the service. That is, if bit 0 = 1 for the results of the
DINT Reset Fuse, then the Reset Fuse failed for point 0.
Choose the physical location, slot number, and data type in the Source Element
and Destination fields.

Communication Tab
The Communication tab provides information on the path of the message

instruction. For example, the slot number of a 1756-OA8D module
distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for.
IMPORTANT Use the Browse button to see a list of the I/O modules in the system. You
choose a path when you choose a module from the list.
You must name an I/O module during initial module configuration to choose
a path for your message instruction. Click OK to set the path.


for Standard and Diagnostic I/O Modules
This section demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled
outputs for standard and diagnostic digital I/O modules. The Change of State
timestamp can be used to synchronize the output turning On or Off based on
the time that the input transitions. The program can be extended to include
synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all
output modules.
In the illustration below, the output follows the state of input 0, but it is
delayed by exactly 10 ms. The advantage of using CST over timers is that the
synchronization is performed at the I/O module, which eliminates any jitter
due to controller or communication delays.
Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads.
For this synchronization to work properly, the 10 ms delay must be long
enough to account for any controller, backplane, and network delays. The
input and output modules must reside in the same rack as a Time Master
(controller). Timestamp units are microseconds.
The following illustrations show the ladder instructions the program uses. The
rungs perform these tasks:
• Rungs 0 and 1 detect the transition from Program to Run mode. This is
used to turn On ‘init’, which causes the program to initialize its tags.
• Rung 2 only executes once and initializes the LastTimestamp.

LastTimestamp is used to detect a Change of State on the input point by
checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed.

• Rung 3 is the main rung that checks for Change of State on the input
point by comparing the current input timestamp
(Time_at_which_Input_Changed) with the last timestamp
(LastTimestamp).
The input point (point 0) must have Change of State enabled or the
timestamp does not update when the point transitions. Once Change of
State has been detected, 10 ms is added to the input timestamp and sent
to the output module's timestamp. This causes the output module to
apply its output exactly 10 ms (10,000 µs) after the input changed state.
The MOVe instructions update LastTimestamp in preparation for the
next change of state.
IMPORTANT Timestamps are eight bytes in size, two DINTS, but only the lower
four bytes of the output timestamp
(Time_at_which_Ouput_Will_Change) are used to schedule the
outputs into the future (to a max of 16.7 s or 16,700,000 μs).
• Rung 4 is the standard XIC-OTE rung that controls the output point
based on the input point.

The only difference is the output module is configured for scheduled

outputs. The outputs are not applied until the scheduled time has
occurred.
The Controller Tags dialog box shows examples of the tags created in
ladder logic.
Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs for Fast I/O

Modules
This section demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled

outputs for fast digital I/O modules. The Change of State timestamp can be
used to synchronize the output turning On or Off based on the time that the
input transitions. The program can be extended to include synchronizing
multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output
modules.
In the example on page 227, the output follows the state of input 0, but it is
delayed by the amount of time in the Delay tag. The advantage of using CIP
Sync over timers is that the synchronization is performed at the I/O module,
which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communication delays.
Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads.
For this synchronization to work properly, the value in the Delay tag must be
long enough to account for any controller, backplane, and network delays.

In this example, the controller, input, and output modules all reside in the same
chassis, but they can reside in separate chassis as long as they are all part of the
same synchronized CIP Sync system. Time-stamp units are microseconds.
IMPORTANT Unlike standard and diagnostic I/O modules that use CST for timestamps,
fast I/O modules use CIP Sync timestamps, which are a full 64 bits in width.
Manipulation of CIP Sync time values requires the use of 64-bit math. The
following example uses 64-bit Add-on Instructions contained in the LINT
(64-bit signed 2's complement integer) Math Library at
http://samplecode.rockwellautomation.com.
The following illustrations show the ladder instructions the program uses. The
rungs perform these tasks:
• Rungs 0 and 1 capture the rising or falling timestamps for input 0 of a

1756-IB16IF module.
• Rung 2 executes only once at the transition from Program to Run mode.
It initializes LastInputTimestamp, which is used to detect a change of
state on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input
data has changed. This rung also clears the output module’s
TimestampOffset bit to disable its Time Step Compensation algorithm.

• Rung 3 is the main rung that checks for a change of state on the input
point by comparing the current input timestamp with the last timestamp
(LastInputTimestamp).
The input point (point 0) must have Change of State enabled.

Otherwise, the timestamp does not update when the point transitions.
Once Change of State has been detected, the value in the Delay tag is
added to the input timestamp and sent to the output module's
timestamp using a COP instruction. This causes the output module to
apply its output at a time equal to the time that the input changed state
plus the Delay time.
The final COP instruction updates LastInputTimestamp in preparation
for the next change of state.
• Rung 4 is the standard XIC-OTE rung that controls the output point
based on the input point. The only difference is that the output module
is configured for scheduled outputs. The outputs are not applied until
the scheduled time has occurred.

The Controller Tags dialog box shows examples of the tags created in ladder
logic.
Reset a Fuse, Perform Pulse Test, and Reset Latched Diagnostics
This ladder logic program shows how to use ladder logic to reset an electronic
fuse for a faulted point, perform a pulse test, and to reset latched diagnostics.
Click the box in each rung to see the associated

configuration and communication.

The rungs perform these functions:

• Rungs 0 and 1 are used to perform a reset fuse service on Bits 0 and 1,
respectively. The example is of a 1756-OA8D module in slot 4.
• Rung 2 performs a pulse test service to slot 4.
• Rung 3 moves the results of the pulse test to a data storage location.
(The actual results appear in the message instruction tags under the tag
name EXERR).
• Rung 4 performs a reset latched diagnostics service to slot 4. This
example shows an output module.
The Controller Tags dialog box shows examples of the tags created in the
ladder logic, as displayed in the tag editor.
Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status
This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module identification and
status through a WHO service. In this application, a message instruction
retrieves this module identification information:
• Product type
• Product code
• Major revision
• Minor revision
• Status
• Vendor
• Serial number
• String length
• ASCII string

A full explanation of each module identification category is provided after the

ladder logic application.
IMPORTANT The ladder logic example in this section uses a user-defined WHO data
structure and a series of Copy instructions (following the Message
instruction in the screen capture) to make the module identification
information more easily understood.
The user-defined WHO data structure displays module identification

information in an easily understood format. For example, the Controller Tags
dialog box shows the module’s major revision is 2.
You do not have to create the user-defined data structure. If you choose not to
create this structure, you can use the ASCII string and String length to retrieve
and understand module identification through some interface excluding the
Logix Designer application.

The illustration shows an example WHO ladder logic application.
The rungs perform these functions:

• Rung 0 constantly polls the module for WHO status. To conserve
bandwidth, only poll for status when necessary.
• Rung 1 extracts the product type and catalog code.
• Rung 2 extracts the module’s major and minor revisions.
• Rung 3 extracts the module’s status information.
• Rung 4 extracts the vendor ID and serial number.
• Rung 5 extracts the module’s ASCII text string and the length of the text
string in bytes.

Table 67 defines the values returned for each rung.

Table 67 - Rung Values
Rung Module ID Retrieved Description
1 Product Type Module’s product type, 7=Digital I/O, 10=Analog I/O
Catalog Code Module’s catalog number
2 Major Revision Module’s major revision
Minor Revision Module’s minor revision
3 Status Module’s status. Multiple bits listed.
Bit 0: 0 = Unowned, 1 =Owned
Bit 1: Reserved
Bit 2: 0 = Unconfigured, 1 = Configured
Bit 3: Reserved
Bits 7-4: Forms a 4-bit number indicating Device Specific Status.
0 = Self-Test
1 = Flash update in progress
2 = Communications fault
3 = Not owned (outputs in Program mode)
4 = Unused
5 = Internal fault (need flash update)
6 = Run mode
7 = Program mode (output mods only)
Bit 8: 0 = No fault, 1 = Minor recoverable fault
Bit 11: 0 = No fault, 1 = Major unrecoverable fault
Bits 15…12: Unused
4 Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor, 1 = Allen-Bradley
Serial Number Module serial number
5 Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module’s text string
ASCII Text String
Module’s ASCII text string description
Review of Tags in Ladder Logic

When you use tags in ladder logic applications, remember these guidelines:
• Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit basis. For
example, point 0 = bit 0 on the module.
• If you are performing a service through the tags, a value of 0 prevents

the action from occurring, and a value of 1 causes the action to occur.
For example, if you want to reset the electronic fuse on a particular bit,
enter 1 in the tags.
• If you are checking the response of a service through the tags, a value of
0 means the bit passed the service, and a value of 1 means the bit failed
the service. For example, if you perform a pulse test and the response
displays a 0 for a particular bit, the bit passed the test.

Notes:

Appendix D
Choose a Correct Power Supply
Use the chart to determine the power your ControlLogix® chassis is using to
prevent an inadequate power supply. We recommend that you use this
worksheet to check the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used.
Slot Module Current @ Power @ Current @ Power @ Current @ Power @

Number Cat. No. 5.1V DC (mA) 5.1V DC (Watts) 24V DC (mA) 24V DC (Watts) 3.3V DC (mA) 3.3V DC (Watts)
0 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
1 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
2 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
3 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
4 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
5 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
6 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
7 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
8 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
9 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
10 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
11 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
12 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
13 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
14 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
15 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
16 x 5.1V = x 24V = x 3.3V =
Totals mA W (1) mA W (2) mA W (3)
This number This number This number
cannot exceed the cannot exceed cannot exceed
following: 2800 mA 4000 mA
10000 mA for
1756-PA72, 1756-
PB72
13000 mA for
1756-PA75,
1756PB75, 1756-
PC75, 1756-PH75
These three wattage values (1, 2, 3), added together, cannot exceed 75 W @ 60 °C (140 °F) for any power supply.

Appendix D Choose a Correct Power Supply
Notes:

Appendix E
Motor Starters for Digital I/O Modules
This appendix provides data to help you choose a ControlLogix® digital I/O
module to drive Bulletin 500 series motor starters in your application. The
tables list the number of motor starters (five sizes are listed for each module)
that a particular digital I/O module can drive.
IMPORTANT When using the tables, remember that the supply voltage for each module
must not drop below the minimum state motor starter supply voltage.
Table 68 - Maximum Allowed 2-3 Pole Motor Starters (120V AC/60 Hz)
Cat. No. Motor Starters
Size 0…1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
1756-0A16I 16 15 @ 30 °C (86 °F) 13 @ 30 °C (86 °F) 8 @ 30 °C (86 °F) 5 @ 30 °C (86 °F)
12 @ 60 °C (140 °F) 10 @ 60 °C (140 °F) 6 @ 60 °C (140 °F) 4 @ 60 °C (140 °F)
1756-OA16 16 14 (only 7 per group) 4 None None
(Only 2 per group)
1756-OA8 8 8 8 8 @ 30 °C (86 °F) 5 @ 30 °C (86 °F)
6 @ 60 °C (140 °F) 4 @ 60 °C (140 °F)
1756-OA8D 8 8 8 None None
1756-OA8E 8 8 8 6 (only 3 per group) 6 @ 30 °C (86 °F)
(only 3 per group)
4 @ 60 °C (140 °F)
(only 2 per group)
Size 0-1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
1756-OA16I 16 16 16 16 @ 30 °C (86 °F) 11 @ 30 °C (86 °F)
13 @ 60 °C (140 °F) 9 @ 60 °C (140 °F)
1756-OA16 16 16 16 4 (only 2 per group) 2 (only 1 per group)
1756-OA8 8 8 8 8 8
Size 0-1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5
1756-ON8 4 @ 30 °C (86 °F) 4 @ 30 °C (86 °F) None None None
3 @ 60 °C (140 °F) 3 @ 60 °C (140 °F)

Appendix E Motor Starters for Digital I/O Modules
Determine the Maximum To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used by any
1756 digital I/O module, refer to this example.
Number of Motor Starters
Table 71 - Number of Motor Starters to be Used

Step Value used in this example
1. Choose your motor starter. Allen-Bradley® Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V AC/60 Hz/2-3 Poles. Inrush 1225VA, Sealed=45VA
2. Determine the number of motor starters required for 11 size 3 motor starters
your application.
3. Choose a ControlLogix digital output module. 1756-OA16I
• Output voltage = 74…265V AC
• Output steady state current per point = 2A maximum @ 30 °C (86 °F)
• & 1A maximum @ 60 °C (140 °F) Linear derating
• Output steady state current per module = 5A maximum @ 30 °C (86 °F) & 4A maximum @ 60 °C (linear derating)
• Output surge current p= 20A maximum for 43 ms repeatable every 2 s @ 60 °C (140 °F)
4. Determine the maximum environmental operating 50 °C (122 °F)
temperature.
5. Confirm the voltage range is within the motor starter Motor starter uses 120V AC
range. 1756-OA16I operates in a 74…120V AC voltage range
6. Confirm the inrush current per point. Inrush of motor starter - Line voltage = Inrush current = 1225VA/120V AC = 10.2 A Inrush
7. Confirm the steady state point current of the module Sealed/Line voltage = Steady state current = 45VA/120V AC = 0.375 A @ 50 °C (122 °F)
can drive the motor starter. Output point current can drive: 2 A- (.033 A x 20 °C) = 2 A - 0.66 A = 1.34 A @ 50 °C (122 °F)
Above 30 °C (86 °F), output point derates to .033 mA/°C (point derating)
The 1756-OA16I output point current (1.34 A) can drive the motor starter (0.375 A @ 50 °C (122 °F)
8. Confirm the 1756-OA16I/A total module current can Motor starter steady state current x 11 motor starters = .375 x 11 = 4.125A @ 50 °C (122 °F)
drive 11 size 3 motor starters @ 50 °C (122 °F). The output total module current can drive: 5A…(.033 A x 20 °C) = 5A -0.66 A =4.34 A @ 50 °C (122 °F)
Above 30 °C (86 °F) total output current derates to .033 mA/°C (Module derating)
The 1756-OA16I total output current (4.34A) can drive the 11 motor starters (4.125 A) @ 50 °C (122 °F)

Appendix F
Major Revision Upgrades
Topic Page
If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying I/O Configuration 240
If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 240
With the exception of fast digital I/O modules (catalog numbers 1756-IB16IF,
1756-OB16IEF, and 1756-OB16IEFS), ControlLogix® 1756 digital I/O
modules are transitioning to use a new, internal backplane Application Specific
Integrated Circuits (ASIC) chip. As a result, the Major Revision number for
these modules has also been upgraded. Digital I/O modules with the new
ASIC have Major Revision 3.x.
IMPORTANT Do not backflash your module’s firmware from firmware revision 3.x to 2.x.
Attempting to backflash or downgrade a module’s firmware from 3.x to 2.x
will irreversibly damage the module.
You must return modules damaged by an attempt to backflash to firmware
2.x to Rockwell Automation.
Modules with the new internal backplane ASIC are form-fit, functional
equivalents to the 2.x modules.
You can use Major Revision 3.x modules as direct replacements for Major
Revision 2.x modules in these cases:
• The electronic keying of the module is specified as Compatible or
Disabled Keying.
• The electronic keying of the module is Exact Keying, then additional
steps are required. See page 240 for details.
The use of the upgraded ASIC also impacts the firmware revisions that can be
flash upgraded to the module. Digital I/O modules at Major Revision 3.x
cannot be backflashed to any 2.x firmware revision. Digital I/O modules at
firmware revision 2.x cannot be flash upgraded to any firmware revision 3.x.

Appendix F Major Revision Upgrades
If Using a Compatible or If you are replacing a 2.x module with a 3.x module and have configured the 2.x
module to use Compatible or Disabled Keying, further steps are not required.
Disabled Keying I/O
Configuration If you use Compatible or Disabled Keying configurations, 3.x modules can be
used as a direct replacements for 2.x modules.
If Using an Exact Match If you are currently using a 2.x module configured at Exact Match keying,
consider changing the module’s electronic keying in the I/O configuration to
Keying Configuration Compatible or Disabled Keying.
If you are replacing a 2.x module with a 3.x module and must use Exact Match
keying in the I/O configuration, take additional action depending on your
version of the programming software.
If you use Exact Match keying and Then do this
RSLogix 5000® software, version 13.04.00 1. Delete the 2.x module from the I/O configuration in the project.
and later 2. Add a new 3.x revision module to the I/O configuration.
RSLogix 5000 software, version 12.06.00 Do one of the following:
and earlier • Change the module’s configuration to Disable Keying.
• Upgrade the software to version 13.04.00 or later and complete
the steps listed for RSLogix™ software, version 13.04.00 or later.

Appendix G
1492 IFMs for Digital I/O Modules
Cable Overview As an alternative to buying RTBs and connecting the wires yourself, you can
buy a wiring system that connects to I/O modules through prewired and
pretested cables.
IMPORTANT The ControlLogix® system has been agency certified using only the
ControlLogix RTBs (1756-TBCH, 1756-TBNH, 1756-TBSH, and 1756-TBS6H).
Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system
using other wiring termination methods may require application specific
approval by the certifying agency.
The combinations include the following:
• Interface modules (IFMs) mount on DIN rails to provide the output

terminal blocks for the I/O module. Use the IFMs with the prewired
cables that match the I/O module to the interface module.
I/O Module Prewired Cable IFM
• Prewired cables are individually color-coded conductors that connect

to a standard terminal block. The other end of the cable assembly is an
RTB that plugs into the front of the I/O module. All of the prewired
cables use 0.326 mm2 (22 AWG) wire.

Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital I/O Modules
Additional prewired cable combinations include the following:
• Digital I/O module-ready cables with free connectors wire into

standard terminal blocks or other type of connectors. The other end of
the cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I/O
module.
I/O Module Prewired Cable with Free Connectors Terminal Block
Most of the I/O module-ready cables use 0.823 mm2 (18 AWG)
conductors for higher current applications or longer cable runs.
• IFM-ready cables have a cable connection to attach to the IFM

prewired to one end. The other end has free connectors to wire to I/O
modules or other components.
Components IFM-ready Cable IFM
The IFM-ready cables use 0.326 mm2 (22 AWG) wire.
Table 72 on page 243 lists the IFMs and prewired cables that can be used with
ControlLogix digital I/O modules.
IMPORTANT For the latest list, see the Digital/Analog Programmable Controller Wiring
Systems Technical Data, publication 1492-TD008.

1492 IFMs for Digital I/O Modules Appendix G
Table 72 - IFMs and Prewired Cables

I/O Cat. No. IFM Cat. No. IFM Type IFM Description Prewired Cable
1756-IA8D 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExU
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20FN Narrow standard
1492-IFM20F-2 Extra terminals
1492-IFM20D120 Status-indicating Standard with 120V AC/DC status indicators(1)
1492-IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators
1492-IFM20D120A-2 120V AC with extra terminals for inputs
1492-IFM20F-FS120A-4 Fusible Two 4-point isolated groups with four terminals per input and 120V AC/DC blown
fuse indicators
1756-IA16 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-3 3-wire sensor type input devices
1492-IFM20D120 Status-indicating Standard with 120V AC/DC status indicators(1)
1492-IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators
1492-IFM20D120A-2 120V AC with extra terminals for inputs
1492-IFM20F-F120A-2 Fusible Extra terminals with 120V AC/DC blown fuse status indicators.
1756-IA16I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS120A-4 Fusible Isolated with 120 V AC status indicators and four terminals per input
1492-IFM40F-FSA-4 Isolated 120V AC/DC with four terminals per input
1492-IFM40F-FS120A-4 Isolated with 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input.
1756-IA32 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExZ
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40D120A-2 Status-indicating 120V AC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs
1756-IB16 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20D24 Status-indicating Standard with 24V AC/DC status indicators
1492-IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC/DC status indicators
1492-IFM20D24A-2 24V AC/DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs
1492-IFM20D24-3 3-wire sensor with 24V AC/DC status indicators
1492-IFM20F-F24A-2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for inputs
1756-IB16D 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS24A-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 24V AC/DC status indicators and four terminals per input
1492-IFM40F-F24AD-4 Fusible Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage indicators, four isolated groups and
four terminals per input
1492-IFM40F-FS24A-4 Isolated with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input(2)
1492-IFM40F-FSA-4 Isolated with 120V AC/DC with four terminals per input

Table 72 - IFMs and Prewired Cables (continued)

1756-IB16I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
1756-IB16IF (x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS24A-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 24V AC/DC status indicators and four terminals per input
1492-IFM40F-FS24A-4 Fusible Isolated with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input
1492-IFM40F-FSA-4 Isolated with 120V AC/DC with four terminals per input
1756-IB32 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExZ
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40D24-3 3-wire sensor with 24V AC/DC status indicators for inputs
1756-IC16 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)
1756-IG16 N/A
1756-IH16I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40F-FSA-4 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC/DC with four terminals per input
1492-IFM40F-FS120A-4 Isolated with 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators with four terminals per input
1756-IM16I 1492-IFM40DS240A-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 240V AC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40F-FS240A-4 Fusible Isolated with 240V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input
1756-IN16 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-F24A-2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for inputs
1756-IV16 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)


1756-IV32 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExZ
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40D24A-2 24V AC/DC status indicators
1492-IFM20D24-2 24V AC/DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs
1756-OA8 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExU
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20DS120-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492-CABLExW
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-FS-2 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC/DC with extra terminals for outputs
1492-IFM20F-FS120-2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1492-IFM20F-FS120-4 Isolated with four terminals with 120V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1492-IFM20F-FS240-4 Isolated with four terminals with 240V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1756-OA8D 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExU
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20DS120-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492-CABLExV
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-FS-2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC/DC with extra terminals for outputs
1492-IFM20F-FS120-2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators
1492-IFM20F-FS120-4 Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators
1756-OA8E 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExU
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20DS120-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492-CABLExV
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-FS120-2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators
1492-IFM20F-FS120-4 Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators


1756-OA16 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20D120N Status-indicating Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators
1492-IFM20D120-2 120V AC/DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs
1492-IFM20F-F2 Fusible Extra terminals for outputs
1492-IFM20F-F120-2 Extra terminals with 120V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1492-IFM20F-F240-2 Extra terminals with 240V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1492-XIM20120-8R Relay Master 20-pin master with eight, 24V DC relays(3)
1492-XIM20120-16R 20-pin master with sixteen, 120V AC relays
1492-XIM20120-16RF 20-pin master with sixteen, 120V AC relays with fusing
1492-XIM120-8R Relay Expander Expander with eight, 120V AC relays(4)
1492-XIMF-F120-2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight, 120V channels with blown fuse indicators(4)
1492-XIMF-2 Feed-through Expander Expander with eight feed-through channels(4)
1756-OA16I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS120-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output
1492-IFM40-FS-2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs
1492-IFM40-FS-4 Isolated 240V AC/DC with four terminals per output
1492-IFM40F-FS120-2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators
1492-IFM40F-FS120-4 Isolated with 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output
1756-OB8 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExU
(x=cable length)
1492-IMF20F-2 Extra terminals
1492-IFM20DS24-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 24/48V AC/DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492-CABLExW
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-FS24-2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators
1756-OB8EI 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS24-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 24/48V AC/DC status indicators and four terminals per output
1492-IFM40F-FS-2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC/DC outputs
1492-IFM40F-FS24-2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1492-IFM40F-FS-4 Isolated 240V AC/DC with four terminals per output
1756-OB8I N/A


1756-OB16D 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS24-4 Status-indicating Isolated with 24/48V AC/DC status indicators and four terminals per output(5)
1492-IFM40F-F24D-2 Fusible Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage status indicator circuit with four
isolated groups and four terminals per output
1492-IFM40F-FS-2 Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC/DC outputs
1492-IFM40F-FS24-2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for outputs(6)
1492-IFM40F-FS24-4 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four
terminals per output(6)
1756-OB16E 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-F2 Fusible 120V AC/DC with extra terminals for outputs
1492-IFM20F-F24-2 Extra terminals with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators
1492-XIM2024-8R Relay Master 20-pin master with eight, 24V DC relays(7)
1492-XIM2024-16R 20-pin master with sixteen, 24V DC relays
1492-XIM2024-16RF 20-pin master with sixteen, 24V DC relays with fusing
1492-XIM24-8R Relay Expander Expander with eight, 24V DC relays(4)
1492-XIMF-F24-2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight, 24V channels with blown fuse indicators(4)
1756-OB16I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
1756-OB16IEF (x=cable length)
1756-OB16IEFS
1492-IFM40F-FS-2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC/DC outputs(8)
1492-IMF40F-FS24-4 Isolated with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output(8)
1492-IFM40F-FS-4 Isolated with 240V AC/DC and four terminals per output(8)
1756-OB16IS 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40F-FS-2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC/DC outputs(8)
1492-IMF40F-FS24-4 Isolated with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output(8)
1492-IFM40F-FS-4 Isolated with 240V AC/DC and four terminals per output(8)


1756-OB32 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExZ
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40F-F24-2 Extra terminals with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1492-XIM4024-8R Relay Master 40-pin master with eight, 24V DC relays
1492-XIM4024-16R 40-pin master with sixteen, 24V DC relays
1492-XIM4024-16RF 40-pin master with sixteen, 24V DC relays with fusing
1492-XIM24-8R Relay Expander Expander with eight, 24V DC relays(4)
1492-XIMF-F24-2 Fusible Expander Eight-channel expander with 24V AC blown fuse indicators(4)
1492-XIM24-16RF Expander with sixteen, 24V DC relays with fusing(9)
1756-OC8 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExU
(x=cable length)
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC/DC with extra terminals for outputs
1756-OG16 N/A
1756-OH8I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40F-FS120-2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC/DC blown fuse indicators
1756-ON8 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExU
(x=cable length)
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC/DC with extra terminals for output
1756-OV16E 1492-IFM20F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExX
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM20F-F24-2 Extra terminals with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators


1756-OV32E 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExZ
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40F-F24-2 Extra terminals with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators for outputs
1756-OW16I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS120-4 Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output
1492-IMF40F-FS24-4 Isolated with 24V AC/DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output
1492-IMF40F-FS120-2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC blown fuse indicators
1756-OX8I 1492-IFM40F Feed-through Standard 1492-CABLExY
(x=cable length)
1492-IFM40DS120-4 Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output
1492-IMF40F-FS120-2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC blown fuse indicators
(1) This IFM is not recommended for use with I/O modules that have an off-state leakage current exceeding 0.5 mA. Use a 1492-IFM20D120N or 1492-IFM20D120A-2 module for inputs. Use a
1492-IFM20D120-2 module for outputs.
(2) The 1492-IFM40F-FS24A-4 module and the 1492-CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756-IB16D module. However, due to the 1492-IFM40F-FS24A-4 module’s blown fuse leakage current rating,
the wire off diagnostic function of the 1756-IB16D module does not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a wire off condition. If you require this diagnostic to function for a blown or removed fuse, you
must use a 1492-IFM40F-F24AD-4 module.
(3) Expandable to 16 by using a XIM120-BR or XIMF-24-2 module.
(4) Can have up to 1 expandable module depending upon master used (total 16 pts or less). Extender cable is provided.
(5) IFMs status indicator provides output On/Off indication. Due to the magnitude of current through the status indicator, the 1756-OB16D module no load diagnostic function does not work. If this
function is required, use the 1492-IFM40F-2 module.
(6) The 1492-IFM40F-FS24-2 and 1492-IFM40F-FS24-4 modules and the 1492-CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756-OB16D module. However, due to the 1492-IFM40F-FS24-2 and
1492-IFM40F-FS24-4 module’s blown fuse leakage current rating, the no load diagnostic function of the 1756-OB16D module does not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a no load condition. If you
require this diagnostic to function for a blown or removed fuse, you must use a 1492-IFM40F-F24D-2 module.
(7) Expandable to 16 by using a XIM24-8R or XIMF-24-2 module.
(8) Do not use this module in Output Sinking mode with fused IFM modules. The IFM module fuses do not properly protect the circuit.
(9) One 1492-XIM24-16RF module is to be used with one 1492-XIM4024-16R or 1492-XIM4024-16RF master (32 pt. only).

Tables 73 and 74 describe the prewired, module-ready cables and connectors

available for your ControlLogix digital I/O modules.
Table 73 - Module-Ready Cables
Cat. No.(1) No. of Conductors Conductor Size Nominal Outer Diameter RTB at the I/O Module End
1492-CABLExU 20 0.326 mm2 (22 AWG) 9.0 mm (0.36 in.) 1756-TBNH
1492-CABLExV
1492-CABLExW
1492-CABLExX
1492-CABLExY 40 11.7 mm (0.46 in.) 1756-TBCH
1492-CABLExZ
(1) Cables are available in lengths of 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 2.5 m, and 5.0 m. To order, insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog number in place of the x: 005=0.5 m, 010=1.0 m, 025=2.5 m,
050=5 m. Build-to-order cable lengths are also available.
Table 74 - Module Connectors

Cat. No.(1) No. of Conductors Conductor Size Nominal Outer Diameter RTB at the I/O Module End
1492-CABLExTBNH 20 0.823 mm2 (18 AWG) 11.4 mm (0.45 in.) 1756-TBNH
1492-CABLExTBCH 40(2) 14.1 mm (0.55 in.) 1756-TBCH
(1) Cables are available in lengths of 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 2.5 m, and 5.0 m. To order, insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog number in place of the x: 005=0.5 m, 010=1.0 m, 25=2.5 m,
050=5 m. Build-to-order cable lengths are also available.
(2) Four conductors are not connected to the RTB.

Index
Numerics ControlNet network

1756-OB16IEF redundant owner 102 input modules in remote chassis 25
output modules in remote chassis 29
rack connection 22
tip on conserving bandwidth 25
A COO. See Claim Owner Output (COO)
agency certification coordinated system time (CST) 40, 224
Class I Division 2, UL, CSA, FM, CE 62 create
array data structure 215 event tags for fast module 88
assemble RTB 122 new module 131
CST Timestamped Data communication
format 134
C CST Timestamped Fuse Data communication
cage clamp RTB 119 format 135
Change of State (COS)
data transmissions 24
diagnostic D
change of state 66 data exchange
modules 66, 73
CIP Sync time 42, 43, 205, 212, 226 peer ownership 78
producer/consumer model 11, 28
Claim Owner Output 102 data structure
Class I Division 2 certification 62 array 215
communication flat 215
format 133 Data with Event connection format 88, 100
producer/consumer model 28 diagnostic
communication format features 61 … 76
about 133 latching 55, 62
CST Timestamped Fuse Data 135 direct connection 21
CST Timestamped Input Data 134 disable
Full Diagnostic Input Data 134
Full Diagnostics 135 change of state 46, 83
diagnostic latching 55
Input Data 134
diagnostics for field power loss 54
Listen Only 134, 135
filtering 86
Output Data 135
module communication 39
Rack Optimization 134, 135
timestamp latching 83
Scheduled Output Data 135
timestamps 83
usage tip 133
dynamic reconfiguration 136
configure
fault state delay 90
input filter time 47 E
input filter times 84
modules 38 edit configuration 136
peer ownership 78 electonic fusing 51
per point timestamping 81 electrostatic discharge 115
point-level output states 49
enable
pulse width modulation 97
redundant owner change of state 46, 83
output module 107 diagnostic latching 55
connection diagnostics for field power loss 54
filtering 86
direct 21 timestamp latching 83
format 133
rack-optimized 21, 22 timestamps 83
Ethernet modules
connection format
redundant owner 103
about 133 event task trigger 25, 87 … 88
Data 134, 135
Data with Event 88, 100, 134 extended-depth housing 123
Listen Only 134, 135
Listen Only with Event 134
Peer Input with Data 135

Index
F install I/O module

fast I/O module assemble RTB 122
connect wires 118
array data structure 215 extended-depth housing 123
CIP Sync time 42, 226 insert into chassis 116
event task trigger 87 … 88 install RTB 125
fault and status reporting 100 … 101 key RTB 117
input module compatibility 77 interface module 12
output module compatibility 78
per point timestamping 81 … 83 internal module operation 18
programmable fault state delay 89
pulse capture 80
pulse width modulation 91 … 99 K
response time 79 keying
software configurable filter times 84 … 86 mechanical 14
fault Removable Terminal Block (RTB) 117
latch 55
type 183
fault reporting L
diagnostic latch
input modules 73
modules 64 fault 55
pulse 80
output modules 75
timestamps 83
fast
Listen Only communication format 31, 134,
input modules 100
output modules 101 135
standard local chassis
input modules 58 input modules 24
modules 37 output modules 28
output modules 59 locking tab 14
features loss of field power 50
common 35 … 60
diagnostic 61 … 76
digital I/O modules 140 M
fast 77 … 101
field power loss detection major revision 130
1756-OA8E module 54, 68 mechanical
field power loss word fusing 51
diagnostic keying 14
input modules 74 minor revision 130
output modules 76
standard output modules 60
flat data structure 215
Full Diagnostic Input Data communication
format 134
Full Diagnostics communication format 135
fuse blown word
diagnostic output modules 76, 101
standard output modules 60
fusing, electronic 51
H
housing options 123
I
IFM. See interface module
Input Data communication format 134
input module
support multiple owners 110

Index
module module identification information 15

1756-IA16 141 ASCII text string 15
1756-IA16I 142 major revision 15
1756-IA32 143 minor revision 15
1756-IA8D 141 product code 15
1756-IB16 144 product type 15
1756-IB16D 145 retrieving 38
1756-IB16I 146 serial number 15
1756-IB16IF 147 status 15
1756-IB32 148 vendor ID 15
1756-IC16 149 module status 15
1756-IG16 150 multiple owner-controllers 31
1756-IH16I 151
1756-IM16I 152
1756-IN16 152 N
1756-IV16 153
1756-IV32 154 NEMA clamp RTB 120
1756-OA16 158 no load
1756-OA16I 159 detection
1756-OA8 155 diagnostic output modules 69
1756-OA8D 156 word
1756-OA8E 157 diagnostic output modules 76
1756-OB16D 163
1756-OB16E 164
1756-OB16I 167 O
1756-OB16IEF 168
1756-OB16IEFS 169 open wire
1756-OB16IS 170 detection 67
1756-OB32 171 word
1756-OB8 160 diagnostic input modules 74
1756-OB8EI 161 output
1756-OB8I 162 data echo 28, 50
1756-OC8 172 field-side verification 71
1756-OG16 173 verify word 76
1756-OH8I 174 Output Data communication format 135
1756-ON8 175 output module
1756-OV16E 176 response time 109
1756-OV32E 177 troubleshooting 111, 112
1756-OW16I 178 ownership 18
1756-OX8I 178
module compatibility controller-I/O module relationship 18
direct connection 21
diagnostic input remote connections 25
input modules 61 Listen-only 22, 31
output modules 62 multiple owners of input modules 31
fast output remote connections 29
input modules 77 rack
output modules 78 connection 22
standard optimization 22, 23
input modules 35
output modules 36
module fault bits, Redundant Owner 50 P
module fault word
peer ownership 78
diagnostic
input modules 74 point-level fault reporting 64
output modules 76, 101 prevent electrostatic discharge 115
standard output modules 60 producer/consumer model 11, 28
pulse
capture 80
latch 80
test 72

Index
pulse width modulation S

configure 97 scheduled output data
cycle limit 93
cycle time 91 fast I/O modules 42, 135, 226
execute all cycles 93 standard and diagnostic modules 40, 224
extend cycle 94 Scheduled Output Data communication
minimum On time 94 format 135
On time 91 specifications 10
stagger output 94 spring clamp RTB 120
status indicators 14, 44
R status reporting
Rack Optimization communication format diagnostic
input modules 73
134, 135 output modules 75
rack-optimized connection 21, 22, 23 fast
Ready Owner Output 102 input modules 100
redundant owner output modules 101
standard
configure input modules 58
output module 107 output modules 59
Ethernet modules 103
multiple controller behavior 105
requirements 103 T
restrictions 103
single controller behavior 104 task, event 25, 87 … 88
troubleshooting 111 timestamps
I/O Module Configuration Error 111 CIP Sync 42, 205, 212, 226
I/O Module Connection Error 111 CST 40, 224
output module 111, 112 diagnostic 63
Redundant Owner, module fault bits 50 latch 83
remote chassis tips
input modules 25 conserving ControlNet bandwidth 25
output modules 29 listen-only communication format 133
removable terminal block 12 pulse test 72
assemble 122 trigger
install 125 event task 25, 87 … 88
key 117 troubleshooting
parts illustration 14 module status indicators 14, 44
remove 127 redundant owner 111
types 119
wire 118
Removal and Insertion Under Power 11, 37, W
115, 125, 127 wiring connections
remove extended-depth housing 123
I/O module 128 field wiring options 50, 69
removable terminal block 127 interface module 12
requested packet interval 24, 73 isolated and non-isolated modules 47
requirements for redundant owner 103 recommendations for wiring RTB 121
response time removable terminal block 12, 118
output module 109
restrictions
redundant owner 103
RIUP. See Removal and Insertion Under
Power
ROO. See Ready Owner Output (ROO)
RPI. See requested packet interval
RSNetWorx software
transfer configuration data 18
RTB. See removable terminal block

.
Rockwell Automation Support

Use the following resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/
Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the phone number for your country. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to
Direct Dial Codes route your call directly to a technical support engineer. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page
Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and

Literature Library http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
Technical Data.
Product Compatibility and Download Get help determining how products interact, check
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
Center (PCDC) features and capabilities, and find associated firmware.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
How Are We Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
Allen-Bradley, ControlLogix, ControlLogix-XT, Data Highway Plus, Integrated Architecture, Logix5000, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLogix, RSLogix 5000, Studio 5000, and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of
Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Supersedes Publication 1756-UM058G-EN-P - December 2014 Copyright © 2017 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 3

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 5

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 7

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Summary of Changes We added information about how to configure the 1756-OB16IEF

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 9

You can view or download publications at

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

What Are ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules?

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 11

Table 1 - ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Table 1 - ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules (continued)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 13

Figure 1 - Parts Illustration

Removable Terminal Block

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 15

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Digital I/O Operation in the

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 17

Ownership I/O modules in a ControlLogix system can be owned by a Logix5000™

Each ControlLogix I/O module must continuously maintain communication

For more information about using multiple owner-controllers, see

1756-OB16IEF Redundant Owner

Redundant ownership lets a single controller use redundant adapters to

See Redundant Owners on page 102.

This section offers an explanation of the time limitations with ControlLogix

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

As shown in the illustration, ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at

Hardware Delay Filter Delay ASIC Delay

Signal Applied Signal Sent to

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 19

ASIC Delay Hardware Delay

Signal Received Signal Sent from

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control system,

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 21

A rack-optimized connection economizes bandwidth between owner-

IMPORTANT Each controller can establish connections, in any combination of direct or

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Figure 2 - Rack-optimized Connection

Local Chassis Remote Chassis

One Connection for

Suggestions for Rack-optimized Connections

• Standard digital I/O modules

IMPORTANT Rack-optimized connections are available only to digital I/O modules.

All ControlLogix inputs are updated asynchronously in relation to the

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 23

The behavior of an input module also varies depending upon whether it

= RPI Multicast 1 Second 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 41381

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017

Trigger Event Tasks

When configured, ControlLogix digital input modules can trigger an event

Rockwell Automation Publication 1756-UM058I-EN-P - December 2017 25